The Path To Nirvana

අපේ අල්මාරියේ රෙදි පිළි ගිනි ගෙන අළු වෙනවා

2008-11-28T17:51:00.000-08:00

පුද්ගලයා යනු රූප, වේදනා, සංඥා, සංඛාර, විඤ්ඤාණ යන ස්කන්ධ පහෙන් නිර්මාණය වූ කෙනෙකි. යම් පුද්ගලයකුට ලෙඩක් දුකක් වේදනාවක් වැළඳුණු විට වෙද්‍ය ප‍්‍රතිකාර කරනුයේ රූපයට හෙවත් ශරීරයට පමණි.

ඒ හේතුව නිසා බොහෝ රෝගීහු වෙද්‍ය ප‍්‍රතිකාරවලින් පමණක් සුවය ලබාගත නොහැකිව දුක් විඳිති.

අතීතයේ ගම්බද චාරිත‍්‍ර වාරිත‍්‍රවලට අනුව කෙනකුට අසනීපයක් වැළඳුණු හැටියේ ම සිදු කළේ ගොක් කොළයක් පොල් ගසක බැඳ එහි පලදාව දෙවියන්ට බාර දීම ය.

රෝගියා සුවපත් වූ විට ඒ ගසේ පොල්වලින් තෙල් හිඳ දේවාලයකට ගොස් පහන් දල්වා භාරහාර ඉටු කිරීමට පොරොන්දු වීම ය. දෙවියන් ලෙඩ සුව නොකළා හෝ වේවා ඒ කි‍්‍රයාවෙන් තමන් සුවපත් වන බවට රෝගියා තුළ ධනාත්මක සිතුවිලි ගොඩනැඟෙන්නට වෙයි.

එවිට බාහිරින් ශරීර ගත කරන ඖෂධවලින් ශරීරය සුවපත්වීමේ වේගය වැඩි වෙයි. මන්ත‍්‍ර ස්තෝත‍්‍ර කීමෙන් ද තෙරුවන් ගුණ කීමෙන් ද පිරිත් දේශනවලින් ද රෝගියා තුළ ඉක්මනින් සුවපත් වීමේ බලාපොරොත්තුව, අධිෂ්ඨානය, ධනාත්මකව මනසට බලපායි.

පිරිත් සූත‍්‍ර ආදියෙන් සත්‍යකි‍්‍රයා බලය ද ගොඩ නැඟෙයි. පුද්ගලයා පාපයෙන් වැළකී දැහැමි වන විට ද දෙවියන්ගේ හෝ වේවා, විශ්ව ශක්තියේ හෝ වේවා බලයෙන් ස්කන්ධ පහ ම පවිත‍්‍ර වී රෝගාබාධ සුවපත් වීමේ ප‍්‍රවණතාව වැඩිවෙයි.

පසුගියදා කුරුණෑගල ප‍්‍රදේශයේ අඹු සැමි යුවළක් තමන්ගේ වයස අවුරුදු 12, 10 පුතකු හා දියණියක සමඟ ගලිගමුවේ ඥානදීප හිමියන් හමුවට පැමිණියහ.

තම නිවසේ වානේ අල්මාරිය ඇතුළේ තිබූ රෙදි පිළි ගිනි ගෙන අළු බවට පත් වන බවත්, රෙදි වැලේ වේළෙන්නට දමා තිබෙන තෙතමනය සහිත රෙදි පවා ගිනි ගන්නා බවත්, බලා සිටියදී මුදුන් යටලීයෙන් පවා ගිනි දලු මතුවෙන බවත් පවසා සිටියහ.

මෙවැනි සිද්ධිවලදී බොහෝ දෙනා මේ කතා විශ්වාස කරන්නේ නැත. මේවා ගෙදර කෙනකු විසින් ම කරනු ලබන බව බොහෝ දෙනා ගේ විශ්වාසයයි.

පවුලේ ම හෝ නිවසේ ම සිටින අයකු විසින් එසේ කරනු ලබන්නටත් පුළුවන. එසේ ම නිවසේ සිටින කෙනකු ලවා අමනුෂ්‍යයෙකු විසින් කරවනු ලබන්නටත් පුළුවන. මෙවැනි දේ සනාථ කරන්නට ති‍්‍රපිටකයේ සඳහන් කරුණු ඉදිරිපත් කළ හැකි යැයි ද ඥානදීප හිමියෝ පවසති.

“සමහර අමනුෂ්‍යයන් තුළ ගිනි ගන්නා ස්වභාවය පවතිනවා. මේ රෙදි පිළි බඩු මුට්ටු ගිනි ගැනීමේ සිද්ධිවලදී ඇත්තටම අමනුෂ්‍යයා ගිනි තියනවා ම නොවේ. ඉතා ම බරපතළ අකුසල් මත පෙ‍්‍ර්ත ලෝකයේ ඉපැදුණු සමහර අමනුෂ්‍යයෝ ගින්නෙන් දැවෙමින් දුක් විඳිති.

අපේ පියවි ඇසට නොපෙනෙන තරම් සියුම් වූ ඒ ඕපපාතික ශරීරවලින් නිකුත් වන ගින්දර ද සියුම් බැවින් අපට පෙනෙන්නේ නැත. එහෙත් ඒ සමහර පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන්ට තමන්ගේ ශරීරය ගොරෝසු කැර ගැනීමේ හැකියාව ද ඇත.

එවැනි පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන් තමන්ගේ ශරීර ගොරෝසු කැර ගන්නට උත්සාහ කරන විට ඔවුන්ගේ ශරීරවලින් ගින්දර පිටවී ඔවුන් ඇසුරු කරන තැන්වල ඇති බඩු මුට්ටු ද ගින්නෙන් ඇවිළී යයි.

මෙවැනි පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන් කීප දෙනකු මහ රහතන් වහන්සේට හමුවූ සිද්ධි සංයුක්ත නිකායේ ලක්ඛණ සංයුක්තයේ සඳහන් වෙයි. භික්ඛු සූත‍්‍රයේ හා භික්ඛුණි සූත‍්‍රයේ සඳහන් දේශනාවලින් මෙවැනි ගිනි ගන්නා පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන් ගැන විස්තර කියැවෙයි.

දිනක් ලක්ඛණ මහ රහතන් වහන්සේ මුගලන් මහ රහතන් වහන්සේ සමඟ ගිජ්ජකූට පර්වතයේ සිට පහළට බැස යද්දී ගිනි ගෙන දැවෙමින් අහසේ පාවී යන භික්ෂුවක් දැක්කා.

ඒ භික්ෂුවගේ සිරුර, සිවුර, පාත‍්‍රය, අඳනය පවා ගිනි ගනිමින් ගිනි දලු පිටවෙනවා දැක්කා.

ශරීරයේ සම් මස් නහර පවා ගිනි ගනිමින් ඒ වේදනාවෙන් විලාප දෙමින් අහසේ එහා මෙහා පාවෙමින් කෑගසන අයුරු පෙනුණා. ඒ වගේ ම ගින්නෙන් දැවෙමින් දුක් වේදනා විඳිමින් අහසේ පාවී යන භික්ඛුණියකුත් දැක්කා.

ම් ගිනි ගනිමින් පාවී යන භික්ඛු, භික්ඛුණීන් දුටු මුගලන් මහ රහතන් වහන්සේට සිනහ පහළ වුණා. ලක්ඛණ මහ රහතන් වහන්සේ මුගලන් හිමියන්ගෙන් “ස්වාමීනි! සිනහ පහළ වූයේ ඇයි දැ’යි ඇහුවා. ඒ ගැන බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ගේ ඉදිරියේ දී අහන්නැයි මුගලන් මහ රහතන් වහන්සේ පිළිතුරු දුන්නා.

ලක්ඛණ මහ රහතන් වහන්සේ ඒ පැනය නැවතත් බුදුරජාණන් වහන්සේ ඉදිරියේදී විමසා සිටියා.

“ලක්ඛණ! ඔය අමනුෂ්‍යයන් මීට කලින් මමත් දැක්කා. තවත් කෙනකු එය දකින තුරු මා ඒ ගැන ප‍්‍රකාශ නොකළේ එය සමහරු නොපිළිගන්නා නිසයි. බුද්ධ වචනය සැක කිරීමෙන් අකුසල් කැරගන්නා නිසයි. ඒ ගිනි ගනිමින් දැවෙන්නේ කාශ්‍යප බුද්ධ සාසනයේ පැවිදිව සිට දුස්සීලකම් කළ පාපී භික්ෂුවක්” යැයි බුදුරජාණන් වහන්සේ දේශනා කළා.

මෙවැනි ශරීර ගිනි ගන්නා අයුරු හා ඒ ගින්නෙන් දැවෙමින් දුක් විඳින අමනුෂ්‍යයන් පිළිබඳ බුදුරජාණන් වහන්සේත් මෙසේ දේශනා කැර තියෙනවා. ඒ වගේ ම ගිනි තියාගෙන සියදිවි හානි කැර ගන්නා අයත් ඒ වේදනාව ම උපාදාන කැරගෙන ගින්නෙන් දැවෙන අමනුෂ්‍ය ආත්මවල උපත ලබනවා.

අනුන්ගේ සිරුරුවලට ගිනි තබා මිනී මරන අයත්, සමහර සත්ත්වයන් පණ පිටින් පුළුස්සා මරණ අයත්, එවැනි ගින්නෙන් දැවෙන පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන් වී උපදිනවා. ගිනි තියාගෙන මැරෙන අය අමනුෂ්‍ය ලොව ඉපැදිලත් ඒ වේදනාව අවසන් නො වී දුක් විඳිනවා.

මෙවැනි අමනුස්සයන් ඒ ගින්නෙන් මැරෙන්නේ නෑ. සම් මස් නහර පිච්චීගෙන ගොස්, නැවත සකස් වෙමින් නැවතත් පිළිස්සෙනවා. ඒ කර්ම විපාකය පල දෙන්නේ එහෙමයි. ඔවුන්ගේ ශරීරය පිච්චුණත් ඕපපාතික උපතක් නිසා මැරි මැරී එහි ම උපදිනවා.

ඒ වගේ ම තවත් කෙනකු ගේ හිතට දුක් ගිනි දෙන උදවියත්, අනුන්ගේ දුක පිළිබඳ වටහා නොගෙන දුක් ගිනි දෙන නිලධාරීන් හා පාලකයන් පවා මෙවැනි අමනුෂ්‍ය ආත්මවල ඉපදී දැවෙමින් දුක් විඳිනවා.

එවැනි දුක් පීඩා විඳින අමනුෂ්‍යයන්ට පින් අනුමෝදන් වෙන්නත් අමාරුයි. ඔවුන් ගේ සිත් දැවෙන වේදනාවෙන් පීඩා විඳින නිසා පින් අනුමෝදන් වෙන්න, පින අනුමෝදන් වී සතුටු වෙන්න ඒ සිතට ඉඩක් නැහැ.

පින යනු පිනා යෑමයි. තමන් වෙනුවෙන් ඥාතීන් පින් දහම් කොට පින් අනුමෝදන් කරන විට සිත සතුටු වී පිනා යෑමෙන්, ඒ පිනේ ශක්තියෙන් පෙ‍්‍ර්තාත්ම භාවයෙන් මිදී උසස් වෙනවා. ඒ වගේ පින්කම් දැක සතුටුවෙන්න ගින්නෙන් දැවෙන පෙ‍්‍ර්තයාට බැහැ. ඒකයි ඒ පෙ‍්‍ර්තයන්ට පින් අනුමෝදන් වෙන්න බැහැය කියන්නේ.

ඒ නිසා එවැනි බරපතළ අකුසල් කළ ඥාතීන් මැරී දුක් විඳින පෙ‍්‍ර්තාත්ම ලබා නිවෙස්වලට පැමිණ තමන්ගේ දුක ඥාතීන්ට පෙන්වන්න ගොරෝසු ශරීර මවා ගන්නා විට ඒ අමනුස්සයා ගොරෝසු ශරීරයෙන් ගිනි දලු පිට වෙනවා. ඒ ගින්නෙන් රෙදි පිළි බඩු මුට්ටු ගිනි ගන්න පුළුවන්.

එවැනි අමනුෂ්‍යයන්ට පින් අනුමෝදන් වෙන්න බැහැ. එහෙත් දානමානාදී කුසල් සිදු කොට පින් අනුමෝදන් කිරීම ඥාතීන්ගේ යුතුකමක්.

ඒ වගේ ම ළිං කැපීම, ළිං කැපීමට ඉඩම් පරිත්‍යාග කිරීම, ළිං කැපීමට උදව් කිරීම, ළිං පිරිසිදු කිරීම මහත් කුසල කර්මයන්. ඒ වගේ ම කුසගින්නෙන් පෙළෙන අයට ආහාර පානයෙන් සංග‍්‍රහ කිරීම, කුසගින්නෙන් පෙළෙන, පැටවුන් දැමූ සතුන්ට ආහාර දීම, ගින්නෙන් පිළිස්සුණු රෝගීන්ට උදව් ප‍්‍රතිකාර කිරීම වැනි පිංකම් ඉතා වැදගත්.

කුරුණෑගල රෙදි පිළි ගිනි ගන්නා ගෙදර අයටත් තමන්ගේ ආරක්ෂාවට පින් දහම්වල යෙදී නිවසේ උදේ හවස තෙරුවන් වැඳ රතන සූත‍්‍රයෙන් පිරිසිදු පැන්වලට ජීවම් කොට නිවස පුරා ඉසීමටත් ඥානාදීප හිමියෝ උපදෙස් දුන්හ.

මතුගම මහින්ද විජේතිලක

එක ගෙදරක අනිසි පැවැත්ම මුළු ගමටම වධයක් වූ හැටි

2008-11-28T17:28:00.000-08:00

මිනිසකු වී උපදින පුද්ගලයා මිනිස් බවේ වටිනාකම වටහා ගත යුතුය. මිනිසත් බව ප‍්‍රයෝජනයට ගෙන ස්වකීය ආධ්‍යාත්මය ගොඩ නඟා ගන්නා පුද්ගලයා සතුටින් සැනසුමෙන් හා සැහැල්ලුවෙන් ජීවත් වී එසේ ම මිය පරලොව යන්නේ සුගතියෙහි උපදී.

මිනිසත් බවේ වටිනාකම නොදැන පංචේන්ද්‍රියයන් පිනවීමට ම යන්න, සිතට වහල් වී ලෝභ, මෝහ, දෙකත් ඒ නිසා ම ද්වේෂයත් බලවත් කැර ගන්නේ මෙලොව ද දුක් විඳ පරලොව ද දුගතිගාමී වෙයි. මේ එවැනි කතාවකි.

මේ හම්බන්තොට ට නුදුරු ගම්මානයකින් ඇසෙන කතාවකි. පියදාස මාමාත් ගුණවතී නැන්දාත් ගමේ කාගේත් ආදරයට කරුණාවට ලක් වූ යුවළකි.

පසළොස්වක පොහෝ දිනට පාන්දරින් ම පන්සලේ හාමුදුරුවනට කොළකැඳ ද සකස් කැර ගෙන යන්නේ සිල් සමාදන් වීමට ය. අනිකුත් දිනවල ද උදේ සවස පන්සිල්හි පිහිටා ආගමික වතාවත්වල යෙදී තමන් ගේ රබර් හා කුඹුරු ගොවිතැනින් ජීවත් වූහ. අසල්වැසි නෑ හිතවතුන්ගේ දුක සැපේදීත් හිතවත්වම සහභාගි වූහ.

ඔවුන්ට දරු තිදෙනෙකි. වැඩිමහල් දෙදෙනා පුත්තු ය. බාලයා දියණියකි. පියදාස මාමා සහ නැන්දා මේ දරු තිදෙනා පෝෂණය කළේත්, ඉගැන්වූයේත් දැහැමිව සාධාරණව උපයා ගත් දෙයිනි.

වැඩිමහල් පුතුන් දෙදෙනා ගමේ පාසලෙන් ඉගෙනුම ලබා සාමාන්‍ය පෙළ සමත්ව රජයේ සාමාන්‍ය රැකියා දෙකක් ලබා ගත්හ. බාල දියණිය මනෝරි ද ගමේ පාසලෙන් සාමාන්‍ය පෙළ සමත් වී උසස් අධ්‍යාපනය සඳහා නගරයේ පාසලකට ඇතුළත් වූවාය. මනෝරි සුරූපීය. එසේ ම පවුලේ අයගේත් ගමේ කාගේත් ආදර කරුණාවට ලක්ව සිටියාය.

මනෝරි නගරයේ අධ්‍යාපනය සඳහා යෑම් ඊම් කරන විට කඩවසම් තරුණයකු සමඟ පේ‍්‍රම සම්බන්ධයක පැටළුණාය. ඔහු නිහාල් ය. නිහාල් අන්‍යාගමික ධනවත් පවුලක තරුණයෙකි. ඔහුගේ අතේ නිතර මුදල් ගැවසුණු අතර මනෝරි ද ඔහු සමඟ විනෝදවීමට පුරුදු වූවාය. මේ ඇයි හොඳයිය මව් පිය දෙදෙනාටත් සහෝදරයන්ටත් ආරංචි වීමෙන් ඇයට අවවාද කළත් එයින් පලක් වූයේ නැත.

නිහාල්ගේ ධනවත් බවට හා විනෝදකාමී චර්යාවන්ට මනෝරිගේ සිත වහල් විය. මේ සම්බන්ධය දැනගත් නිහාල්ගේ පවුලේ අය ද ඔවුන් ගේ ආගමික හා ආර්ථික නොගැලපීම නිසා විරෝධය පළ කළහ. හිතුවක්කාර තරුණ සිත් මේ සම්බාධකවලට නම්‍යශීලී වූයේ නැත.

අවවාද නොරිස්සූහ. මනෝරි විභාගයෙන් ද අසමත් වූවාය. මව්පියන්ගේ හා සහෝදරයන්ගේ විරෝධතාවලට ප‍්‍රතිකි‍්‍රයා ලෙස ඇය කළේ නිහාල් සමඟ විවාහ වී කුලී ගෙයක පදිංචියට යෑම ය.

මෙය සහෝදරයන් දෙදෙනාට කෙසේ වෙතත් පියදාස මාමාටත් ගුණවතී නැන්දාටත් බලවත් වේදනාවකට හේතු විය. වර්තමාන සමාජයේ මෙවැනි සිද්ධීන් විරල නොවූව ද මේ හුරුබුහුටි කෙල්ල, හුරතලයට හැදුණු දියණිය පවුලෙන් ඈත්වීම ඇත්තෙන් ම වේදනාවක් විය.

මාස කීපයක් ගත වන විට මනෝරි ගැබනියකව තනිවම ගෙදර වැඩවල යෙදෙන අයුරු ආරංචි වී ගුණවතී නැන්දා දුවත් බෑණාත් ගෙදරට ගෙන්වා ගත්තාය.

නිහාල් මත්පැනට ගිජු වූවෙක් බැවින් ටික දිනකින් ගමේ කීප දෙනෙකු ද මිතුරු කරගෙන බීමට එක්විය. ඔවුන් ගේ බේබදු සාජ්ජ හඬ ගමේ දැහැමි පරිසරයට කැළලක් විය.

නිහාල් ගේ බේබදු සමාගමයට කට ගැස්ම හැදීම මනෝරි අතින් සිදුවිය. පංච ශීලයේ පිහිටා තම නිවසේ පියදාස මාමාත් ගුණවතී නැන්දාත් ගොඩනඟා ගෙන තිබු දැහැමි නිසංසල සංස්කෘතිය හා පරිසරය උඩු යටිකුරු වී ගියේය.

මේ දෙමහල්ලන්ට පෝය දාට සිල් සමාදන්වීමට පන්සල් යෑමට නොහැකි තරමට ම ලැජ්ජාව ඉහවහා ගියේය. මනෝරි සිය සැමියා ගේ පදයට ම නටන්නට වූයෙන් ඇයට ලැජ්ජාව හා බිය අමතක කරන්නට සිදු වී තිබුණි.

මේ තත්ත්වය තවත් ඉහළ යමින් නිහාල් මේ ගෙදර වත්තේ කුකුළු ගොවිපොළක් පටන් ගත්තේය. ඒ මදිවාට ඌරු කොටුවක් ද පටන් ගත්තේය. මාස දෙකක් පමණ ගතවන විට නිහාල් අතින් ම දිනකට කුකුළන් පනහක හැටක බෙලි කපා වෙළෙඳ පොළට ගෙන ගියේය.

දින කීපයකට වරක් ඌරකු මරා මස් කොට අලෙවි කළේය. මස් ගෙන යෑමට නිවසට පැමිණෙන මිනිසුන්ට මුහුණ දිය නොහැකිව මව්පිය දෙදෙනාට නිවසේ මුළු ගැන්වී සිටීමට සිදු විය. මේ අතර පවුලේ පුතුන් දෙදෙනා සතියේ නිවාඩු දිනවලදීවත් ගෙදර නොසිටින තත්ත්වයක් උදාවිය. ඒ පිළිබඳ ගුණවතී නැන්දා පුතුන්ගෙන් විමසූ විට

“අම්මයි තාත්තයි කිසි දේකට බය වෙන්න එපා. තව ටිකක් ඉවසන්න” යැයි කීවා මිස වෙනත් දෙයක් කීවේ නැත.

කුකුළු කොටුවෙන් හා ඌරු කොටුවෙන් නැඟෙන දුර්ගන්ධය නිසා ඇති වූ බහින්බස් වීම්වලින් අසල්වැසි නෑයෝ ද අමනාපයට පත් වූහ. කුකුළන් කෑ ගසද්දී බෙලි කපන හඬ බෙලි කපන විට කෙඳිරි ගාන හඬ, ඌරන් මරද්දී කෑ ගසන හඬ ඉවසන්නට නොහැකිවූ මව් පියෝ රෝගාතුර වූහ. දුර්වල වූහ. උණු නිසා කන්නටත් බැරි කිරි නිසා ඉවත දමන්නටත් බැරිව දියණිය නිසා සියල්ල විඳ දරා ගන්නට ඔවුන්ට සිදුවිය.

දැන් දැන් එන පොට හොඳ නැති බව වටහා ගත් පියදාස මාමා ගුණවතී නැන්දා සමඟ නුවණක්කාර තීරණයකට එළැඹියේය. තමන් සතුව තිබු රබර් අක්කර හතරක වටිනා ඉඩම රහසේ ම පුතුන් දෙදෙනා නමට ඔප්පු ලිව්වේය. අක්කර බාගයක කුඹුර ගමේ පන්සලට ලිව්වේය. ගෙය සහිත අක්කරයක ඉඩම කිසිවකුට නොලියා ඉතුරු කළේය. මේ ඔප්පු ලිවීම කිසිවකුට නොදන්වා ඔප්පු දෙක රහසේ තබා ගත්තේ ය.

මේ අතර නිහාල්ගේ කුකුළු කොටුවට වසංගත රෝගයක් වැළඳී කුකුළෝ මිය ගියහ. මේ බව සමාජයට රහසක් කොට තබා ගෙන මැරෙන මැරෙන රෝගී කුකුළන් වහා සුද්ධ කොට වෙළෙඳ පොළට යැවීමට තරම් මනෝරි හා නිහාල් දක්ෂ වූහ. නිහාල් ගේ උපදෙස් පරිදි මනෝරි දිනක් මව්පිය දෙදෙනාට යෝජනාවක් ගෙනාවාය.

“අම්මේ! අපිට ආයෙත් අලුතින් කුකුළු ෆාම් එක පටන් ගන්න වෙලා. රබර් ඉඩම විකුණලා අපට සල්ලි ඕනෑ” යි මනෝරි කීවාය.

“අනේ දුවේ අපි ජීවත්වෙන්නේ ඔය ඉඩමෙන් නේද? උඹලට ඉගැන්නුවෙත් ඔය ඉඩමෙන්. පරම්පරාවෙන් ආපු ඉඩම අපි කොහොමද විකුණන්නේ. එතකොට අය්යලා දෙන්නා අපේ මිනීවලටත් සාප කරාවි” යි ගුණවතී නැන්දා කීවාය.

“ඕවා කියලා හරියන්නේ නෑ. අපට ඉඩම විකුණලා ඉක්මනින් සල්ලි ඕනෑ” යි කියූ මනෝරි ගස්සා ගෙන කාමරයෙන් පිටවී ගියාය.

මේ දෙබසට රහසේ සවන් දී සිටි නිහාල් වෙරි මතින් කෑගසන්නට වීය.

“මට සල්ලි නොදුන්නොත් මනෝරි උඹ බලාපං මං කරන දේ. නාකි ජෝඩුව බෙල්ල කපලා මරනවා. නැත්නම් ගහලා පන්නනවා” යි කියමින් කාමරයට පැන පියදාස මාමාගේ බෙල්ල මිරිකා තර්ජනය කළේය.

මේ වටිනා රබර් ඉඩම විකුණන කතාව ගමේ පැතිරීම නිසා ගැනුම්කරුවෝ ද මිල ඉහළ නංවමින් ඉදිරිපත් වෙන්නට වූහ. කෙසේ හෝ ගෙදර තත්ත්වය ආරංචි වූ පුතුන් දෙදෙනා පසු දින ම මව්පියන් බලන්නට නිවසට පැමිණියෝය. ඒ වන විටත් ගෙදර බේබදු සාජ්ජයකි. කාමරයට වී අසරණව සිටි මව්පිය දෙදෙනාට පුතුන් දෙදෙනා දැකීම මහත් සැනසිල්ලක් විය.

“කව්ද? බොලව් මෙතන කෑගහන්නේ”යි පොල්ලක් අතට ගත් බාල පුතා ශබ්ද නඟා අසනවාත් සමඟ ම සාජ්ජකාරයෝ උන් හිටි තැන් අමතකව දුවන්නට වූහ. නිහාල් ද බිරිය සමඟ කාමරයට රිංගා ගත්තේ ය.

පුතුන් දෙදෙනා කාමරයට කැඳවූ පියා රහසක් කියමින් ඔප්පු දෙක ලොකු පුතා අතට දුන්නේය.

“මේ මොකක්ද තාත්තේ?”

“මම රබර් ඉඩම පුතාල නමට ලිව්වා. කුඹුර පන්සලට ලිව්වා” යි පියා රහසේ පැවසුවේය.

“තාත්තත් අපි වගේ ම වැඩක් කරලා” යි බාල පුතා කුතුහලය වඩන කතාවක් කීවේය.

“ඒ මොකක්ද පුතේ?” ගුණවතී නැන්දා ඇසුවාය.

“අම්මේ! මේ ටික සිද්ධ වෙන බව අපි දෙන්නට කලින් ම තේරුණා. අපි අනුරාධපුරෙන් ඉඩම් කට්ටි දෙකක් අරගෙන ගෙවල් දෙකක් හැදුවා. ලබන පළවෙනිදා අපි රස්සාවලිනුත් අනුරාධපුරේට මාරුවීම් හදාගත්තා” යි ලොකු පුතා කීවේය.

“අපි දැන් යනවා” පොඩි පුතා කීවේය.

“අනේ! බුදු පුතේ අපට දැන් මේ අපායෙ ඉන්න බෑ” යි ගුණවතී නැන්දා හඬන්නට වූවාය.

“අම්මා බය වෙන්න එපා. අපි හෙට උදෙන් ම එනවා” යි කියූ පුතුන් දෙදෙනා පිටත්ව ගියහ.

පසු දින උදේ ගමේ වැඩිම ඉල්ලුම්කරුට පුතුන් දෙදෙනා රබර් ඉඩම විශාල මුදලකට විකුණුවේය. ඉඩම ගත්තේ ද ඔවුන්ගේ ම මාමා කෙනෙකි. නගරයේ දී ඉඩමට ඔප්පු ලියා ලබා ගත් මුදල මව්පිය දෙදෙනා වෙනුවෙන් බැංකු ගිණුමක තැන්පත් කොට ඔවුන්ට පිනට දහමට වැය කිරීමට අවස්ථාව සලසා දීමට පුතුන් දෙදෙනා තීරණය කළහ.

රබර් ඉඩම මිලට ගත් මාමාගේ ම ලොරියක් ලබා ගත් මේ පුතුන් දෙදෙනා නිවසට ගොස් මව්පිය දෙදෙනා ද අවශ්‍ය බඩු මුට්ටු ද පටවා ගෙන අනුරාධපුරය බලා ගියහ.

මනෝරි හා නිහාල් දෙදෙනාගේ බලාපොරොත්තු ඉටු නොවීමත් මව්පියන් තමන් හැර යෑමත් ඔවුන්ට ද මානසිකව බලපාන්නට හේතුවක් ද විය. තමන්ට අලෙවිය සඳහා දැනට ඇති එකම දෙය ඌරු කොටුවේ සිටින ඌරන් හතර දෙනා පමණි.

එදා පුරපසළොස්වක් පෝය දවසකි. එය නිහාල්ට එතරම් දෙයක් ද නොවේ. පිහියත් රැගෙන ඌරු කොටුවට ගිය නිහාල් එහිදීම ඌරන්ගේ බෙලි කපන්නට වීය. බීමතින් සිටි ඔහු සිහි විකලයෙන් ඌරන් තුන් දෙනෙකුගේ බෙලි කපා උන්ගෙන් වැගිරෙන ලේ මත සිටිමින් සිව්වැනි ඌරා අල්ලාගන්නට තැත් කරද්දී ලිස්සා ගොස් වැටුණේ ය.

වැටුණා වැටුණාමය. ඔහුගේ දකුණු අංශය අප‍්‍රාණික විය. කතාව ගොළු වීය. කෑගසන්නේ ඌරකු ගොරවන්නා සේය. මනෝරි අන්තිමට ම අසරණ වූවාය. ඇයට නිහාල්ගේ මිතුරනට සිරුර විකුණනවා හැරෙන්නට වෙනත් ආදායමක් නොවීය. අසල්වැසි සියලු දෙනා තද අමනාපයෙනි. දෙසතියකට පසු නිහාල් ඌරකු සේ ම ගොරවමින් මිය ගියේය.

නිවස වටා ඇති නිවෙස්වල අයට කිසිම දිනක මසක්, මාළුවක්, කරවලයක්, බිත්තරයක් උයා පිහාගෙන බැදගෙන ආහාරයට ගැනීමට නොහැකි තත්ත්වයක් උදාවිය. එසේ ආහාරයට ගත්තත් එහි කිසිම රසයක් නැත.

ලුණු මිරිස් රස පවා අතුරුදන්ව ඇත. එසේ ම එම මස් මාළු කරවල ආහාර තිබෙන තුරු රාති‍්‍රයට ඒ නිවෙස්වල පිටත සිට ගොරවන හඬ කෙඳිරිගාන හඬ ඇසෙයි. මනෝරිගේ නිවසේ ද නිතරම එම ශබ්ද ඇසෙන අතර ඌරු කොටුව දෙසින් ඌරන් දඟලන හඬ ගොරවන හඬ ඇසෙයි. දැන් එම ඌරු කොටුවේ ඌරන් ද නැත.

ඒ නිවෙස්වල අයට තම නිවෙස් ඉතා පිරිසුදුව තබා ගෙන දීර්ඝ කාලීනව උදේ සවස පිරිත් සජ්ඣායනය කළ යුතු බවත් දින දහ හතරකින් නැවත තත්ත්වය වාර්තා කරන ලෙසත් ගලිගමුවේ ඥානදීප හිමියෝ නියම කළහ.

මතුගම මහින්ද විජේතිලක

Aftermath of a Bomb Blast near Sambhodi Viharaya - Colombo 1

2008-05-16T05:10:00.000-07:00

A glass plate protecting a statue of Buddha is damaged at a temple near the scene of the bomb explosion in Colombo May 16, 2008. A suspected Tamil Tiger suicide bomber rammed his motorbike into a police bus in the Sri Lankan capital on Friday, killing 10 people, the military and hospital authorities said.

අවසන් හුස්ම දිගේ මහරගමින් ස්කොට්ලන්තයට

2008-04-22T00:41:00.000-07:00

පියවි ඇසින් ඔබ්බට

අප විසින් කරනු ලබන යහපත් කි‍්‍රයාවලට ආනිශංස ලෙස යහපත් ප‍්‍රතිඵල ද අයහපත් පාපී කි‍්‍රයාවලට ආදීනව ලෙස අයහපත් ඵල විපාක ද මරණයෙන් මතු විඳින්නට සිදු වන බව අපි දනිමු. මේ ලිපියෙන් කියැවෙනුයේ වර්තමාන ජීවිතයේ මා අත් දුටු කාරණා කීපයකි. මේ සිද්ධි වෙන කෙනකු ගේ නොව මගේ ම බිරිය ගේ ජීවිතය තුළින් හෙළිදරව් වූ ඒවා ය. ඇගේ නම චන්ද්‍රා විතාන හෙවත් චන්ද්‍රා විජේතිලක ය. ඇය දිරිය බිරියක් මෙන් ම දිරිය මවක් ද වූවා ය.

1998 වර්ෂය වන විට අපි මතුගම නගරයේ සිල්ලර වෙළෙඳ සලක් පවත්වා ගෙන ගියෙමු. එතැන සිට අපේ නිවසට දුර කිලෝ මීටර් තුනක් පමණ වේ. උදේ පාන්දර නැගිට දරුවන් අවදි කරවා, උයා පිහා, ළමයින්ට කවා පොවා පාසල් යවා, නිවසේ සිටින මගේ මෑණියන්ට ද උදේ - දහවල් ආහාර සකසා තබා මා සමඟ වෙළෙඳ සලට යෑම ඇගේ සිරිත ය. ආපසු නිවසට එන්නේ රාත‍්‍රි 7 න් පසුව ය.

එදා 1998 නොවැම්බර් මස 06 වෙනි දා ය. දහවල් 12 ට පමණ චන්ද්‍රා මා අමතා “ඒයි, අපි කඩේ වහලා ගෙදර යමු” යි කීවා ය.

නගරයේ වෙළෙඳ සලක් දහවල් 12 ට පමණ වසා දමන්නේ ඉතා ම විශේෂ හේතුවක් වුණොත් පමණි. චන්ද්‍රා ගේ යෝජනාව මගේ මවිතයට හේතු විය.

”ඇයි මොකද හදිසියේ?” යි මම ඇසීමි.

”හදිසියක් නෑ. දැන් අම්මටත් වයසයිනේ. අපි කඩේ වහල ගෙදර ගිහින් අම්මා දොස්තර මහත්තයෙක් ළඟට එක්කර ගෙන ඇවිත් පෙන්නලා එයාට සුදුසු විටමින් වගේ දෙයක්වත් අරගෙන දෙමු. එයාගෙ හිතත් සතුටු වේවි නේ” යි චන්ද්‍රා කීවා ය.

මම ද ඇගේ කීමට එකඟව වෙළෙඳ සල වසා ඇය සමඟ ගෙදර (යතුරු පැදියෙන්) ආවෙමි. එන අතරමග දී හිතවත් ති‍්‍රරෝද රථයකට ද (ජී. ඩී. සේනාරත්න) අපේ ගෙදරට එන්නට යැයි කියාගෙන ආවෙමි’

අප නිවසට එන විට මගේ මව නිවසේ ඉදිරිපස ප‍්‍රධාන උළුවස්සට හේත්තු වී මඟ බලා ගෙන සිටියා ය. අප එනු දැක “අද මොකද ජෝඩුව වේලපහින් ම” යැයි සිනාවෙමින් ඇසුවා ය.

”නිකම් එන්න හිතුණා වේලපහින්” කියා ගෙන චන්ද්‍රා ගෙතුළට ගියා ය. ඇය කාමරයට ගොස් ඇඳුම් මාරු කොට මුහුණ කට සේදීමට ගියා ය. ඒ සමඟ ම අම්මා ඇගේ කාමරයට ගියා ය. මේ අතර ති‍්‍රරෝද රථය ද පැමිණියේ ය. මම අම්මා සිටි කාමරයට ගියෙමි. අම්මා ඇගේ යහනේ හරස් අතට, දෙකකුල් බිමට සිටින සේ නිදා සිටියා ය. ඒ ඉරියව්ව අසීරු ඉරියව්වක් බවත්, ඇය අමුතු ස්වභාවයකින් සිටින බවත් මට වැටහිණි. ති‍්‍රරෝද රියේ සේනාරත්න ද හිතවතකු බැවින් ඔහු ද මා සිටින තැනට ම පැමිණියේ ය. මම ඔහු ගේ ද සහාය ලබා ගෙන අම්මා ඔසොවා ඇඳේ නියමාකාරයෙන් තැබීමි. අම්මාට නින්ද ගොස් තිබුණේ ද නැත.

මේ වන විට චන්ද්‍රා සූදානම් වී “අම්මට ලැහැස්ති වෙන්න කිව්වේ නැද්දැ” යි අසා ගෙන කාමරයට ආවා ය.

”කෑ ගහන්න එපා. අමුත්තක් දැනෙනවා. තව ටිකක් බලමු” යි මම කීවෙමි. අම්මාට ඇහෙන්නට පිරිත් ටිකක් කියන්නට ඕනෑ යැයි සිතුණු මම අම්මා ගේ හිස තියෙන පැත්තෙන් කුඩා පුටුවක් තබා හිඳ ගත්තෙමි. අම්මාට ඇහෙන්නට ම හඬ නඟා පන්සිල් සමාදන් වූයෙමි. ඊළඟට තෙරුවන් ගුණ පාඨ කියා වන්දනා කළෙමි. ඉන් පසු එක් අතක් අම්මා ගේ හිසට තබා ගෙන රතන සූත‍්‍රය කියන්නට පටන් ගතිමි.

මේ වන විට අම්මා අහසට අත දිගු කරමින් “හරි හරි මම එන්නම්” යැයි කීවා ය.

රතන සූත‍්‍රය කියා “සංඝා නමස්සාමි සුවත්ථි හෝතු” යි අවසන් ගාථා පාඨය කියනවාත් සමඟ ම ෂූ... යන හඩින් අම්මා අවසන් හුස්ම හෙළුවා ය.

චන්ද්‍රා ගේ වුවමනාව මත අප වෙළෙඳසල වසා ඒ වේලාවේ ගෙදර නොපැමිණියා නම් අම්මා ගේ මරණය සිදු වූයේ කොයි වේලේ දැ යි කිසිවකු දන්නේ ද නැත. එසේ ම දහවල් 2 ට පමණ දරුවන් පාසල ඇරී ගෙදර එනතුරු කිසිවකු දන්නේ නැත. එදා කඩය වසා ගෙදර එන්නට හිත් දුන්නේ ඇයි දැයි චන්ද්‍රාවත් දන්නේ නැත. “මට නිකම් හිතුණා අම්මා දුර්වල නිසා බෙහෙත් ටිකක් අරගෙන දුන්නොත් හොඳයි කියා. ඒකයි එන්න හිතුණේ” යි ඇය කීවා ය. මේ සියල්ල ති‍්‍රරෝද රියේ රියැදුරු මහතා ද බලා ගෙන ය.

ඊළඟට චන්ද්‍රා ගේ කතාවයි. ඇයට වයස අවුරුදු පනස් එකේ දී ආහාර ගැනීමේ අපහසුතාවක් වැළඳිණි. ආයුර්වේද වෙදකමෙන් ද බටහිර වෙදකමෙන් ද වෛද්‍යවරුන් ගෙන් හා වෛද්‍ය විශේෂඥයන් ගෙන් ප‍්‍රතිකාර ලබා දුන්න ද එයින් කිසි ම ගුණයක් ලැබුණේ නැත. ආහාර ගනු ලැබුයේ ඉතා ම ස්වල්පයකි. එහෙත් පලතුරු හා වඩාත් පෝෂ්‍යදායී පිටි කිරි වර්ග ද විටමින් වර්ග ටික ටික හෝ නිතර ලබා දීම නිසා ඇය ශාරීරිකව දුර්වල වූයේ ද නැත. ගෙදර දොර සියලු කටයුතු නොපිරිහෙලා ඉටු කළා ය. ප‍්‍රතිකාර කළ සෑම වෛද්‍යවරයකු ම නිගමනය කළේ ඇයට අම්ලපිත්ත (ගැස්ට‍්‍රයිටීස්) රෝගය ඇති බව ය. ඒ නිසා මිරිස් හා ඇඹුල් අධික ආහාරවලින් වැළකී වැඩිපුර දියර ආහාර ගනිමින් ප‍්‍රතිකාර ලැබුවා ය. මේ අතර දාන මාන, බෝධි පූජා ශාන්ති කර්ම ආදිය ද ඇගේ සහභාගීත්වයෙන් ම කළෙමු.

අවසානයේ විශේෂඥ වෛද්‍ය පරාක‍්‍රම දිසානායක මහතා වෙත ඉදිරිපත් කරන ලදුව ඇයට අක්මාවේ පිළිකාවක් වැළඳී ඇතැයි නිගමනය කැරිණි. එය මටත්, දරු තිදෙනාටත්, සමීප නෑදෑ හිතවතුන්ටත් බලවත් වේදනාවක් හා කම්පනයක් වීය. එහෙත් චන්ද්‍රා පුදුම ආත්ම ශක්තියකින් කඳුළක් නොහෙළා (අපට පෙනෙන්නට) සිනහ මුහුණෙන් ඊට මුහුණ දුන්නා ය.

ඇය වයස අවුරුදු පනස් තුනේ දී ජීවිතයෙන් සමුගත්තාය. ඇය මියගියේ බිරියක වශයෙන් හා මවක වශයෙන් ඉටු කළ යුතු යුතුකම් සියල්ල නිමා කිරීමෙන් පසුව ය. අපේ තරමේ හැටියට ගේදොර අලුතින් සාදා නිම කොට දරු තිදෙනාටද උගන්වා රැකියාවලට ගිය පසු ව ය. ඇගේ ධෛර්යය නොවන්නට මේ කටයුතු කිසි විටෙක මේ අයුරින් ඉටු නොවනු ඇත. ඇය නියමිත රාජකාරියත් ඉටු කොට ආපසු ගියා හා සමාන ය. පවුලේ කටයුතු මෙන් ම ඇසුරු කළ සමාජයේ යුතුකම් ද ආගමික කටයුතු ද ඇය මැනවින් ඉටු කළා ය.

ඇය අසනීප වී රෝගය හඳුනා ගත් අවසන් වසර තුළ අපේ ආදායම් මාර්ග ඇන හිටියේ ය. එහෙත් ඥාති මිත‍්‍රයන් ගේ උදව් උපකාර මත අපට කිසි ම දෙයකින් අඩුවක් වූයේ නැත. ගරුතර මහා සංඝ රත්නයේ ආශීර්වාදය ද එසේ ම වී ය. විශේෂයෙන් ම බෙල්ලන පිරිවෙනේ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ සතියකට වරක් වැඩම කොට සෙත් පිරිත් දේශනා කළේ තම මවට දක්වන කරුණාවෙන් ම ය. අවට විහාරස්ථානවලින් ද එසේ ම ය.

සතියකට වරක් මතුගම සිට මහරගම රෝහලට යන ගමන සඳහා “මට බස් එකේ යන්න පුළුවන්. බොරුවට වාහන වලට වියදම් කරන්න එපා” යැයි ඇය පැවසුව ද කවුරු හෝ ඒ ගමනට වාහනයක් සපයා දුන්හ. ඉඳ හිට දිනක බස් රියෙන් මහරගම රෝහලට ද ගිය ද එහි දී කවුරුන් ම හෝ කෙනකු මුණගැසී එතැන සිට ගෙදරට ම එන්නට පහසුකම් යෙදුණි. ඇය මහරගම රෝහලේ නේවාසිකව සිටිය දී බෙල්ලන පිරිවෙනේ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ තිස් පස් නමක් රෝහලට වැඩමවා සෙත් පිරිත් දේශනා කළහ. රෝහල පුරා සිටින රෝගීන්ට ද පිරිත් පැන් දෙමින් පිරිත් නූල් ගැට ගසමින් රෝගීන්ට කළ ආශීර්වාදය අසිරිමත් වීය. එදින නෑදෑ හිතවතුන් ගේ සහයෙන් තැඹිලි, පලතුරු හා යෝගට් දානයක් ද රෝගීන්ට පිරිනැමිණ. ඇය රෝගීව සිටින විට “මට හෙට අසවල් දෙය ඩිංගක් කන්නට ඇත්නම්” යැයි කියූවොත් පසු දින ඇය බලන්නට එන හැම කෙනකු ම ඒ වර්ගය ම ගෙන ඒම පුදුමයට කරුණක් වීය. ඒ අපේ දැනුම් දීමකින් නම් නොවේ. ඇය අඹ කෑමට ප‍්‍රිය කළා ය. ඒ දිනවල බොහෝ දෙනෙක් අඹ ගෙනාහ. එසේ ම අපේ මිදුලේ තිබෙන කිසි ම දිනයක අඹ නොහැදුණු රට අඹ ගසේ ද ඒ වාරයේ අඹ පල ගත්තේ ය. එසේ ම ඇගේ මරණයෙන් පසු ව එහි අඹ ඵල හට ගත්තේ නැත.

මා ලියූ පොත් කියැවූ දුරකතනයෙන් හඳුනා ගත් රත්නපුරයේ වැදගත් ප‍්‍රභූ පවුලක් වීය. ඒ භද්‍රා මාරපන පවුල යි. මාරපන මැතිනිය සෑම දිනක ම රාති‍්‍ර 9.00 න් පසු චන්ද්‍රා සමඟ විනාඩි 45 ක් පමණ දුරකතනයෙන් සතුටු සාමීචියේ යෙදුණා ය. ඒ ඇගේ සිත සුවපත් කිරීමට ය. මාරපන මැතිනිය ගේ නම ද චන්ද්‍රා ය. පවුලේ අය ඇය අමතන්නේ සුදු හාමිනේ නමිනි. මගේ බිරිය ද චන්ද්‍රා ය. ඇයට ද කුඩා කල සිට ම සුදු හාමිනේ යැයි නම පටබැඳී තිබිණි. මාරපන මැතිනිය කියන්නේ මෙය සංසාරික සම්බන්ධතාවක් බවයි’

2004 අපෙ‍්‍ර්ල් මාසයේ ඉතා උණුසුම් දිනයක සවස 6.00 ට පමණ චන්ද්‍රා දියණියන් දෙදෙනා ඇමතුවා ය. “බලන්න මේ දවස්වල දහදිය ගලන හැටි. හරිම රස්නෙයි. ඔයගොල්ලො මට පටි නයිටියක් මසා දුන්නේ නැහැනේ” යි කීවා ය. ඇයට අවශ්‍ය වූයේ උරහිස්වල පටි දැමූ රාති‍්‍ර ඇඳුමකි. ඇය නිතර ම ඇන්දේ අත් සහිත සිරුර නොපෙනෙන ඇඳුම් ය.

”ඇයි චන්ද්‍රා! ඔයා ම නේද ඉස්සර ළමයින්ට අවවාද කළේ ගෑනු ඇඟ පෙනෙන්නට අඳින්න හොඳ නෑ කියලා” යැයි මම විහිළුවට ඇයට සිනාසුණෙමි.

ඇය මා දෙස බලා පරාජය බාර ගත්තා සේ බිම බලා ගත්තා ය. ඊට පසු දින උදේ 8.00 වන විට රත්නපුරේ මාරපන යුවළ ඇය බැලීමට අපේ ගෙදරට පැමිණිය හ. ඔවුන් ගෙනා තෑගි බෝග අතර පටි ඇල්ලූ නයිටි ද ගෙනැවිත් තිබුණි. එය ද අපේ කිසිම දැනුම් දීමකින් නොවේ.

මගේ බිරිය රෝගීනට ඇප උපස්ථාන කළා ය. දුගී මගී යාචකයනට, විශේෂයෙන් ම පුලන්නන්ට දන් දුන්නා ය. ඇගේ මවටත්, මගේ මවුපිය දෙදෙනාටත් ඉතා ඕනෑකමින් හා ඉවසීමෙන් සාත්තු සප්පායම් කළා ය. මහා සංඝරත්නයට ශ‍්‍රද්ධාවෙන් දන් දුන්නා ය. කර්ම විපාකයක් ලෙස පිළිකා රෝගය වැළඳුණ ද ඇයට අවශ්‍ය සියලු දෙය ලැබුණේ ඇගේ දන් පින්වල දිට්ඨ ධම්ම වේදනීය ආනිශංසයෙනියි සිතමි.

බෙල්ලන පිරිවෙනේ පරිවෙණාධිපති නා හිමියන් ගේ වැඩිමහල් ශිෂ්‍යයා රාජකීය පණ්ඩිත ශාස්ත‍්‍රපති කඹුරාවල සිරි රේවත හිමියෝ ය. මාත් මගේ බිරියත් උන් වහන්සේට සලකන්නේ අපේ ම දරුවකුට ලෙසිනි. මේ වන විට උන් වහන්සේ වැඩිදුර අධ්‍යාපනය සඳහා ස්කොට්ලන්තයට වැඩම කොට සිටියහ. උන් වහන්සේ ලංකාවට වැඩම කළ සෑම දිනයක ම තමන් ගේ මවුපියන් බලන්නටත් පෙර මගේ රෝගී බිරිය ගේ සුව දුක් බැලීමට පැමිණි සේක.

අවසාන භාගයේ දිනක “මම මැරෙන්න කලින් ආයෙත් රේවත හාමුදුරුවන් දැක ගන්න ලැබෙන එකක් නැහැ නේදැ” යි දිනක් චන්ද්‍රා මගෙන් විමසුවා ය. සතියක් ගත වූයේ නැත. රේවත හිමියෝ හදිසියේ ම ලංකාවට වැඩම කළහ. අපේ නිවසට ද වැඩම කොට ඇයට සෙත් පිරිත් දේශනා කළහ. ස්කොට්ලන්තයේ සිට ම ඖෂධ වර්ග පවා ගෙනැවිත් තිබිණි.

2004 මැයි මාසයේ 19 දින ප. ව. 3.00 වන විට චන්ද්‍රා ගේ සියලු ඉන්ද්‍රියයන් කි‍්‍රයා විරහිත බවක් පෙනිණි. ඇගේ ශරීරය අප‍්‍රාණික ය. යම්තමින් හුස්ම වැටෙනවා පමණි, කතාවක් ඇස් හැර බැලීමක් පවා නැත. වහාම වෛද්‍යවරයකු ගෙන්වා සේලයින් දෙන්නට උත්සාහ කළත් එය ද සාර්ථක නො වී ය. මේ අතර බෙල්ලන පිරිවෙනෙන් ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ පැමිණ සෙත් පිරිත් දේශනයක් ද කළහ. අප හැම කෙනෙකු ගේ ම නෙත් කඳුළින් පිරී ඇත. රාතී‍්‍ර 7.00 ට පමණ මතුගම රෝහලේ ප‍්‍රධාන වෛද්‍යවරයා කැඳවා සේලයින් දීමට උත්සාහ කළ ද එයත් අසාර්ථක වීය.

”අපට වඩා නර්ස්ලට පළපුරුද්ද තියෙනවා. පුළුවන්කමක් තිබුණොත් හෙට උදේට රෝහලට ලෙඩාව ගෙන එන්නැයි” පවසා වෛද්‍යවරයා යන්නට ගියේ ය.

පසු දා උදේ ද ඒ තත්ත්වය ම තිබූ නිසා ඇගේ අක‍්‍රීය ශරීරය රෝහලට ගෙන ගියෙමු. හෙදියක් එක් වර ම සාර්ථකව සේලයින් ශරීර ගත කිරීමට සමත් වූවා ය. චන්ද්‍රා ඇස් ඇර බැලුවා ය. එහෙත් කතා කිරීමට නො හැකි ය. අප කියන දේ හොඳින් ඇයට ඇසෙන බව පෙනෙන්නට තිබිණි. මේ මැයි මස 20 වෙනි දා ය. දැන් ඇයට සේලයින් සමඟ විටමින් වර්ග ශරීර ගත වෙයි. එදින රාති‍්‍ර 7.00 ට පමණ මම ඇගේ දෑත් අල්ලා ගෙන “චන්ද්‍රා මේක ගැහැනු වාට්ටුවක් නෙ. අපිට ඉන්න බැහැ නෙ. චූටි දුව ඔයාගෙ ළඟ නතර වෙලා ඉන්නවා. පුතයි මමයි ගෙදර ගිහින් පාන්දරින් ම එන්නම්” යැයි කීවෙමි. ඇය උගුරෙන් ගොර ගොර හඩින් මොනවා දෝ තෙපළා ය. එය “හොඳයි ගිහින් එන්න හෝ ඔයා එන්න කලින් මමත් මෙහෙන් ගිහින් තියේවි” යන්න විය හැකි ය. පසු දින පාන්දර 5 වන විට මමත් පුතාත් රෝහලට ගියෙමු. චූටි දුව හඬා ගෙන අප ඉදිරියට ආවා ය. චන්ද්‍රා පාන්දර 3 ට අපෙන් සමුගෙන ගොස් තිබිණි. ඇගේ සිරුර රෝහලෙන් නිදහස් කැර ගැනීම සඳහා ඇගේ රෝග නිර්ණය වෛද්‍ය වාර්තා අවශ්‍ය බැවින් පුතා සහ අනික් ඥාතීන් එහි සිටිය දී මම යතුරු පැදියෙන් වහා ම නිවසට ආවෙමි. මා එන විට නිවසේ දුරකතනය නාද වෙමින් පැවතිණි. මම ඉක්මනින් දොර හැර දුරකතනය ගතිමි. ඒ ස්කොට්ලන්තයේ සිටින රේවත හාමුදුරුවෝ ය.

”මහින්ද මහත්තයා මගේ ෆෝන් කාඩ් එකේ සල්ලි ඉවර වේගනයි යන්නේ. කට් වෙන්න කලින් මම ඔන්න කතාව කියනවා. මේක හීනයකුත් නොවෙයි. හැබැහිනුත් නොවෙයි. ඊයේ දීප්තිමත් සුදු සාරියක් හැඳ ගත් කාන්තාවක් අපේ විහාරයට ආවා. මම බැලුවා මේ අවේලාවේ කවුද මෙහෙම තනියම කියා. ඇය මට පිටුපා ගෙන විහාරයට ගියා. ධාතු කරඬුවට පසඟ පිහිටුවා වැන්දා. ආපසු මා දෙසට හැරී ආවා. එතකොටයි මම හඳුනා ගත්තේ “චන්ද්‍රා නෝනා කොහොමද මෙහෙ” කියලා මට ඉබේම කියැවුණා.

එතකොට චන්ද්‍රා නෝනා “හාමුදුරුවනේ, මම නිදහස් වුණා” යි හිනැහෙමින් කියා ගෙන ඇවිත් මට වැඳලා අතුරුදන් වුණා. මේකයි කතාව දැන් ලෙඩාට කොහොමද?” හාමුදුරුවෝ එක දිගට පවසා ඇසූහ.

”අනේ!! හාමුදුරුවෝ චන්ද්‍රා අද පාන්දර.....” මට ඉන් එහා කියාගත නොහැකි විය.

”අනේ... හ්...“ දුරකතනය විසන්ධි විය.

(http://www.silumina.lk)

The Story of Theri Bahuputtika : Dhammapad Verse Verse 115

2008-04-17T02:53:00.000-07:00

Introduction: This is the story of a female who strives hard to attain Nibbana in this very life. Here she met all the three factors:

a. Bahuputtika had accrued enough perfection in the past

b. Bahuputtika entered the Order of Sangha

c. Bahuputtika living her last existence in this very life

Having met all the three qualifications, she attained Nibbana in this very life. This again shows that any one irrespective of male or female, one could attain Nibbana in this very life, if he or she meets the three factors.

While residing at the Jetavana monastery, the Buddha uttered Verse (115) with reference to Bahuputtika, a mother of many children.

Dhammapad Verse Verse 115

Once in Savatthi, there lived a couple, with their seven sons and seven daughters. All the children got married and the family was doing quite well. Then, the father died and the mother kept all the property without giving anything to the children. Her sons and daughters wanted the inheritance, so they said, to their mother, "What benefit do we get from our property? Can't we make it multiply? Can't we look after our mother?" They said such things again and again so their mother thought that her children would look after her, and she finally divided up the property without leaving anything for herself.

After the division of the property, she first went to stay with her eldest son, but her daughter-in-law complained and said, "She has come and stayed with us, as if she has given us two shares!", and such other things. So, Bahuputtika went to stay with her second son, and the same things were said. Thus, she went from one son to another, from one daughter to the next; but none of them was willing to take her on for a long stretch of time and none paid her due respect.

The old lady was hurt and felt bitter against her children; she left her family and became a bhikkhuni. Because she was a mother of many children she came to he known as Bahuputtika. Bahuputika realized that she became a bhikkhuni only in her old age and that she must not be negligent, but must make use of the remaining period of her life to the utmost. So, for the whole night, she meditated on the Dhamma taught by the Buddha. The Buddha seeing her from the Jetavana monastery, through supernormal power, sent forth the radiance and appeared seated in front of her. Then the Buddha said to her, "The life of one who does not practice the Dhamma taught by me is useless, even if he were to live for a hundred years."

Then the Buddha spoke in verse as follows:

Verse 115. Better than a hundred years in the life of a person who does not comprehend the Noble Dhamma (Dhammamuttamam), is a day in the life of one who comprehends the Noble Dhamma.

At the end of the discourse Bahuputtika attained Arahatship.

කුම්භ ඝෝෂක සිටුතුමාගේ කථා වස්තුව - දියුණුවේ රහස

2008-04-17T00:50:00.000-07:00

පින්වතුනේ, පින්වත් දරුවනේ, සමහර කාල වල දී සිදු වෙන විපත්ති නිසා මනුෂ්‍යයින් හට බොහෝ හානි සිදුවෙනවා. එවැනි විපත්ති කාලයක් රජගහ නුවරට ඇතිවුණා. අහිවාතක නම් වූ භයානක රෝගයක් පැතිර ගියා. බේරෙන්නට පුළුවන් වුණේ ටික දෙනාට යි. බොහෝ දෙනෙක් ඒ රෝගයෙන් මිය ගියා. එක්තරා සිටු මැදුරකටත් ඒ රෝගය පැතිරුණා. සිටුතුමාත් බිරිඳත් තමන්ගේ පුතා කැඳෙව්වා. “පුතේ, අපටත් අහිවාතක රෝගය හැදුණා. දැන් ඉතින් අපේ ජීවිතය විශ්වාස නෑ. මේ රෝගය හැදුන කෙනෙක් බේරුණේ නෑ. මගේ පුතේ, අසවල් අසවල් තැන් වල ධනය සඟවලා තියෙනවා. කෝටි හතළිහක පමණ වස්තුව එහි තියෙනවා. පුතේ, හොඳින් මතක තියාගන්න. අමතක වෙන්න දෙන්න එපා..... දැන් ඉතින් වහාම මේ පළාත ම අත්හැරලා පැනල යන්න. රෝගය බෝවෙන්න කලින් පැනගනින් පුතේ... මේ පව්කාර රෝගය සංසිඳුනු කාලයක ඒ සියලු වස්තුව පුතාට ගන්න පුළුවන්.” මව් පිය බස පිළිගත්තු පුතා රජගහ නුවර අත්හැර පැනගියා. දුක සේ ජීවත් වුණා. නැවත රජගහ නුවරට පැමිණුනේ වසර දොළහකට පස්සෙයි.

එතකොට තමන් ව හඳුනන කවුරුවත් රජගහ නුවර නෑ. අහිවාතක රෝගයෙන් බොහෝ දෙනෙක් මැරිලා තිබුණා. තමන්ගේ සිටු මැදුර තිබුණ තැන සොයාගෙන ගියා. හැම දෙයක් ම ගරා වැටිලා තිබුණා. නමුත් මව් පියන් පෙන්නපු ධනය තියෙන තැන් හොඳින් ආරක්ෂා වෙලා තිබුණා. පුතා කල්පනා කළා. “මං අඳුරන කව්රුවත් මෙහෙ නෑ. මව් පියන්ගේ ධනය තවම ආරක්ෂා වෙලා තියෙනවා. නමුත් මේක මම ගන්න ගියොත් කව්රුවත් මා ගැන නො දන්නා නිසා මං අමාරුවේ වැටෙනවා.”

පුතා ධන ආසාව අත්හැරියා. කුලී වැඩ කරන්න පටන් ගත්තා. අන්තිමේ දී නුවර ප්‍රධාන වීදියේ කම්කරුවන්ව පාන්දරින් අවදිකරවන රස්සාව ලැබුණා. මෙම පුතා මහ හඬින් කථා කරලා කම්කරුවන්ව අවදි කරවනවා. මොහුගේ හඬ ගාම්භීර යි. ගිගුම් දෙනවා. මේ නිසා මොහුට ඝෝෂක කියන නම වැටුණා. දිනක් මොහුගේ දෝංකාර දෙන ගැඹුරු හඬ බිම්බිසාර රජුටත් අසන්නට ලැබුණා. රජු කල්පනා කළා “මේ හඬ සාමාන්‍ය හඬක් නොවෙයි. මේ හඬට අනුව නම් මොහු මහා ධනවතෙක් විය යුතුයි.”

බිම්බිසාර රජු ඝෝෂකව කැඳෙව්වා. විස්තර විමසුවා. සිටු පවුලට අයිති කෝටි හතළිහක ධනය ගොඩට ගත්තා. ඝෝෂකට ඒ සියල්ල පැවරුවා. රජගහ නුවර සිටු තනතුර දුන්නා. මෙවැනි මහා ධනයකට හිමිකරුවෙක්ව ඉඳගෙනත්, සාමාන්‍ය කම්කරු රැකියාවක් කරන්නට තරම් මොහුගේ ගුණවත් කමත්, නුවණත්, වීරියත් ගැන කවුරුත් පැහැදුනා. රජතුමා බුදුරජාණන් වහන්සේ ළඟට ඝෝෂක සිටාණන් ව කැඳවාගෙන ගියා.
එවේලෙහි දී භාග්‍යවත් බුදුරජාණන් වහන්සේ මෙම ගාථාව වදාළා.

4. උට්ඨානවතෝ සතිමතෝ
සුචිකම්මස්ස නිසම්මකාරිනෝ
සඤ්ඤතස්ස ච ධම්ම ජීවිනෝ

නැගී සිටිනා වීරියෙන් යුතු
ඉතා හොඳ සිහි නුවණකින් යුතු
පිරිසිදුව කරනා දෙයින් යුතු
සොයා බලනා නුවණකින් යුතු
මනා සංවර සීලයෙන් යුතු
ධාර්මික ජීවිතයකින් යුතු
පමාවෙන් තොර දිවි ගෙවන්නා
වේ ය ලොව කිතු ගොස ලබන්නා

පින්වතුනේ, පින්වත් දරුවනේ, දියුණුවේ රහස බලන්න. කෙනෙක් දියුණු වීමට වුවමනා කරන මූලික කරුණු සියල්ල ම මෙතන තියෙනවා. පළමුවෙනි කාරණාව උට්ඨාන වීරිය යි. එනම් නැගී සිටීමේ වීරිය යි. මේ කෙනා හැම තිස්සේ ම ප්‍රබෝධමත් සිතින් ඉන්නවා. ජීවිතය ගැන නිරවුල් ව සැලසුම් කරනවා. ඒ සැලසුම් ක්‍රියාත්මක කරනවා. නැගී සිටිනා වීරිය එය යි.

ඒ වගේ ම හොඳ සිහි නුවණක් අවශ්‍ය යි. සිහි නුවණක් නැත්නම්, උත්සාහයෙන් නියම ප්‍රයෝජනය ගන්නට බැහැ. ඒ නිසා තමන් කරන සෑම දෙයක් ගැන ම හොඳ සිහියක් තියෙන්නට ඕනෙ. ‛මා මෙපමණ ගණනක් උපයනවා. මා වියදම් කළ යුත්තේ මෙපමණ යි.’ ආදී වශයෙන් සිහි නුවණින් යුතුව හැම දෙයක් ම කරනවා.

සුචිකම්ම කියන්නේ පිරිසිදු දේවල් කියන එක යි. පිරිසිදු වැඩ කටයුතු යනුවෙන් අදහස් කරන්නේ හොරයක්, බොරුවක්, වංචාවක්, රැවටීමක් නැතිව අවංකව කටයුතු කිරීම යි. අවංකව කටයුතු කරන කෙනා ඒ අවංකකම නිසා ම සමාජයේ පිළිගැනීමකට ලක්වෙනවා. එබඳු කෙනෙක් සමඟ ගනුදෙනු කරන්න කවුරුත් කැමතියි.

ඒ වගේ ම නුවණින් විමසා සොයා බලා කටයුතු කිරීම බුද්ධිමත් කෙනෙකුගේ ලක්ෂණය යි. නිසම්මකාරී කියන්නේ ඒ තැනැත්තාට යි. ඉතින් තමන් කරන කියන කටයුතු නුවණින් විමසා බලා කරනවා නම්, ඔහුට වරදින්න තියෙන අවස්ථා අඩුයි. ඔහුට දියුණු වෙන්න තියෙන අවස්ථා වැඩියි.

පුද්ගලයෙකුගේ ජීවිතයක් සාර්ථක වීමට යම් කිසි සංවරකමක් අවශ්‍ය යි. ඒ සංවරකම ලැබෙන්නේ තමන්ගේ ධාර්මික ජීවිතයත් සමඟ යි. සංවරකම තුළින් තමන්ගේ චරිතය සංවර්ධනය වෙනවා. ධාර්මික ජීවිතය තුළින් තමන්ට ලොකු සතුටක් ලැබෙනවා. අනුන්ට යහපත සිදුවෙනවා. මේ ලක්ෂණ ඇති ජීවිතය ලෞකික වශයෙන් අප්‍රමාදී ජීවිතයක්. මේ කෙනා තුළ සතුන් මැරීම නෑ. සොරකම් කිරීම නෑ. අනාචාරයේ හැසිරීම නෑ. බොරුව, වංචාව නෑ. මත් පැන් මත් ද්‍රව්‍ය පාවිච්චිය නෑ. මෙබඳු කෙනෙක් ලෞකික වශයෙන් ප්‍රමාද නෑ. ඒ නිසා ම මෙබඳු කෙනෙකුගේ යශෝරාවය හැම තැන ම පැතිරෙනවා.

පින්වතුනේ, පින්වත් දරුවනේ, මේ ලක්ෂණ ඔබත් ඇති කර ගන්න. ජීවිතයක් ලෞකික වශයෙන් සාර්ථක වීමට මෙම ගාථාවේ සඳහන් උතුම් කරුණ සම්පූර්ණයෙන් ම බලපානවා. පත පත හිටියා කියලා කිසි කෙනෙක් දියුණු වෙන්නෙ නෑ. දියුණු වෙන්නේ එයට වුවමනා කරන හේතු කාරක ධර්ම ඇති කරගත් දවසට යි.

නන්ද මහරහතන් වහන්සේ ගේ කථාව

2008-04-17T00:49:00.000-07:00

ධර්මය තුළින් සිත නො රැකුණොත් අමාරුවේ වැටෙනවා. ධර්මය තුළ රැඳූනු සිත හැම තිස්සේ ම රැකෙනවා.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, අපේ සිද්ධාර්ථ කුමාරයා ගේ පවුලේ තොරතුරු ඔබ සෑහෙන්න දන්නවා. මහමායා බිසවුන් වහන්සේ කළුරිය කළේ සිදුහත් කුමාරයා ඉපදිලා දවස් හතේ දි. ඊටපස්සේ බිසව බවට පත් වුණේ ප්‍රජාපති ගෞතමී දේවිය යි. එතුමිය ඉතාමත්ම කරුණාවන්ත කෙනෙක්. තමන් ගේ ම දරුවෙකුට වගේ සිදුහත් කුමාරයාටත් කිරි පොවා සැළකුවා. ඒ ප්‍රජාපතී ගෞතමී දේවියට දරුවන් දෙදෙනෙක් ලැබුණා. පුතා තමයි නන්ද කුමාරයා. දුවට කිව්වේ නන්දා කුමරිය කියල යි.

සම්බුද්ධත්වයෙන් පසු බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ කපිලවස්තු නගරයට වැඩම කළ බව අපි කලින් කථා කළා නෙ. සුද්ධෝදන රජතුමා ගේ ඔටුන්න හිමි කුමාරයා වෙලා හිටිය සිදුහත් කුමාරයා පැවිදි වුණාට පස්සේ ඔටුන්න හිමි කුමාරයා බවට පත් වුණේ නන්ද කුමාරය යි. නන්ද කුමාරයා ගේ ඔටුනු පළඳින අභිෂේක මංගල්‍යයත්, අළුතෙන් රජමැඳූරට පිවිසීමේ මංගල්‍යයත්, කුමාරියක් සරණපාවා ගැනීමේ මංගල්‍යයත් එක දවසේ ම කිරීමට යි ඔවුන් කටයුතු සංවිධානය කරමින් සිටියේ. ඔය අතරේ තමයි බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ මාළිඟාවට වැඩම කරලා ධර්ම දේශනා කළේ. ඒ ධර්මය ඇසූ සුද්ධෝදන රජතුමා, ප්‍රජාපතී බිසව මඟඵල ලැබූ බවත් ඔබ දන්නවා. ඉතින් එදා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ රජමාළිඟාවේ දහම් දෙසලා ආපසු නිග්‍රෝධාරාමයට වඩින්න සූදානම් වුණා. නන්ද කුමාරයා උන්වහන්සේ ළඟින් හිටගෙන හිටියා. “පින්වත් නන්ද, මේ පාත්‍රය ගන්න” කියලා නන්ද කුමාරයා ගේ අතට බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ තම පාත්‍රය දුන්නා. නන්ද කුමාරයාට හරි සතුටුයි. තමන් ගේ සහෝදරයා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ නමක් නිසා. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලාත් සමඟ හෙමින් හෙමින් නිග්‍රෝධාරාමයට වඩිනවා. නන්ද කුමාරයා හිතුවේ මාළිඟවේ පඩිපෙළ ළඟ දී හෝ දොරටුව ළඟ දී හෝ පාත්‍රය ආපසු ගනීවි කියල යි. නමුත් බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ පාත්‍රය ආපසු ගත්තේ නැහැ. ඒ නිසා ම උන්වහන්සේත් සමඟ ම පසුපසින් යන්නට නන්ද කුමාරයාට සිදු වුණා. ඔය අතරේ නන්ද කුමාරයා සමඟ සරණ බන්ධනයට පැමිණුන ජනපද කල්‍යාණී නම් අතිශයින් ම ලස්සන කුමාරිය මාළිඟාවේ උඩුමහළේ සඳළුතලයේ සිට බලාසිටියා. ඇය නන්ද කුමාරයාට අතිනුත් ඇස්වලිනුත් හඟවලා කිව්වා ආපසු ඉක්මණින් ම එන්න කියලා. ඇය ආදරයෙන් සිනහ වෙවී බලාගෙන සිටියා. නන්ද කුමාරයා ඇයගේ රූපයට වසඟ වෙලයි හිටියේ. ඔහුත් ඇය දිහා බලලා ඉක්මණින් ම එනවා කියන අදහසින් සිනහ වුණා. අන්තිමේ දී නන්ද කුමාරයා පාත්‍රයත් අරගෙන නිග්‍රෝධාරාමය දක්වාම ගමන් කළා. නිග්‍රෝධාරාමයේ දී පාත්‍රය බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ගේ අතට දුන්නා. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ නන්ද කුමාරයාගෙන් මෙහෙම අසා වදාළා. “පින්වත් නන්ද, ඔයත් මේ අනිත් ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා වගේ පැවිදි වුණොත් හොඳයි නේද?” නන්ද කුමාරයාට කරගන්න දෙයක් නැහැ. ජනපද කල්‍යාණිව මතක් වෙන්න ගත්තා. ආපසු මාළිඟාවට දුවගෙන යනකල් සිහි නැතුව හිටියේ. නමුත් දැන් බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ම පැවිදි වෙන්න කියනවා. තමන් ගේ ආදරණීය සහෝදරයාණන් වහන්සේ සිද්ධාර්ථ ගෞතමයන් වහන්සේ පැවිදි වෙන්න කියා කියද්දී මඟ හරින්නේ කොහොම ද? ඒක කොහොමත් ම කරන්න බැහැ. නන්ද කුමාරයා “හොඳයි ස්වාමීනී” කියලා කැමැති වුණා. පින්වත් දරුවනේ, බැ බැල්මට පෙනෙන්නේ නන්ද කුමාරයාට මහා අසාධාරණයක් වුණා වගේ. ඔටුනු පළඳින්න හිටිය, ලස්සනම කුමාරිකාවක් සමඟ විවාහ වෙන්න හිටිය කුමාරයෙකුට ඒ අවස්ථාව නැති වුණා නේද කියලා ඔබට හිතෙන්නට පුළුවනි. නමුත් අප මෙතැන දී සිතිය යුත්තේ අපි බලන පිළිවෙලට නොවෙයි. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ නමක් මේ ජීවිතය දිහා බලන පිළිවෙළට යි.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, මේ සංසාරය කියල කියන්නේ සතර අපායෙහි වැටි වැටී යන ගමනක්. ඒ ගැන බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ මේ විදිහට අවබෝධ කරගෙන තියෙනවා. යම් කෙනෙක් සක්විති රජවෙලා උපන්නොත් ඒක මේ සාමාන්‍ය රජකමකට වඩා ඉතාමත් ම ශ්‍රේෂ්ඨ දෙයක්. ඒකට හේතුව නම් ඒ සක්විති රජතුමා ධර්මයෙන් මිසක්, අධර්මයෙන් රජ කරන්නේ නැතිකමයි. ඔහු අවිආයුධවලින් තොරව රටවැසියා සීලයෙහි පිහිටුවලා, ධර්ම රාජ්‍යයක් බිහි කරනවා. ඒක විශාල පිනක්. ඒ පින නිසා ම ඒ සක්විති රජුත් මරණින් මතු දෙවියන් අතරේ උපදිනවා. නමුත් ඒ දෙවියන් ගේ දිව්‍ය ආයුෂ අවසන් වුණාට පස්සේ නිරයේ උපදින්න වුණත් පුළුවනි. තිරිසන් අපායේ උපදින්න වුණත් පුළුවනි. ප්‍රේතලෝකයෙහි උපදින්න වුණත් පුළුවනි. ඒ කියන්නේ ඒ කෙනා නෑම අපායක උපදින්න පුළුවන් බව යි. ඔහුට තිබෙන්නේ එවැනි අනතුරක් නම්, ඒ සක්විති රජකම ඉතාම තාවකාලික එකක් නොවේ ද? නමුත් පින්වත් දරුවනේ, ඉතා දිලිඳූ කෙනෙක් වුණත් චතුරාර්ය සත්‍ය ධර්මය අවබෝධ කරලා සෝවාන් වුණොත් එයා මරණින් මතු දෙවියන් අතරේ උපදිනවා. ඉතින් ඒ කෙනා ඒ දිව්‍ය ආයුෂ අවසන් වුණාට පස්සේ එක්කෝ මිනිස් ලෝකෙට ඒවි. එහෙමත් නැත්නම් ආයෙමත් දෙවියන් අතර උපදීවි. ඒ කෙනා කිසිසේත් ම සතර අපායේ වැටෙන්නේ නැහැ. එහෙමනම් වඩාත් ම රැකවරණයක් තියෙන්නේ කාට ද? සක්විති රජතුමාට ද? සෝවාන් වුණු දුප්පත් කෙනාට ද? මේ නිසා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ධර්මය අවබෝධ කිරීම ම යි වඩාත් ශ්‍රේෂ්ඨ ලෙස දැක්කේ. උන්වහන්සේ මෙහෙම වදාළා. “මේ මහා පොළොවේ අධිපතිකම ලබනවාටත් වඩා, දෙව්ලොව උපදිනවාටත් වඩා, සියළු ලොවට අධිපති වනවාටත් වඩා, සෝවාන් වීම උතුම්” කියලා. ඒ නිසා නන්ද කුමාරයා ගේ පැවිදි වීම ගැන අපි සිතන්න නෑ ඔය විදිහට ම යි. එහෙම නැත්නම්, අපට මේ වෙනස තේරුම් ගන්න බැරිව යනවා.

ඉතින් පින්වත් දරුවනේ, නන්ද කුමාරයා පැවිදි වුණා. දැන් නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ලස්සන සිවුරු පොරොවනවා. වටිනා පාත්‍රයක් පරිහරණය කරනවා. ඇතැම් විට ඇස්වල අඳූන් පවා ගානවා. මෙයා පැවිදි වුණා ලස්සනට ඉන්න ම යි කල්පනාව. වනයට ගියත්, ගස් සෙවණට ගියත්, තනි වුණ හැම වෙලාවෙම ජනපද කල්‍යාණිය ගේ රූපය ගැන හිත හිතා ඉන්නවා මිසක්, ධර්මය සිහි කරන්නේ නැහැ. එතකොට නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ සිහි නුවණ පිරිහෙනවා. රාග සිත් ඇති වෙනවා. අන්තිමේ දී ජනපද කල්‍යාණිය ගැන හිතල හිතල හිත හොඳට ම විසිරුණා. සිහිනෙන් පෙනෙන්නෙත් ජනපද කල්‍යාණි ඔහුට අඬගසන ආකාරය යි. අන්තිමේ දී සිත හදා ගැනීම හොඳට ම බැරි වුණා. සිවුරු හැර යන්න තීරණය කළා. ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලාට කිව්වා. “අනේ ... මට හරි අමාරුයි. ඇඟ බරයි. සිතට සැහැල්වක් නෑ. කරන්න න කුමක් ද කියල මට තේරෙන්නෙ නෑ. මං මේ සිල් රකින්නේ සතුටින් නොවේ. මං ආපහු මාළිඟාවට යනවා.” මෙය ඇසූ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලාට මහත් අනුකම්පාවක් හට ගත්තා. ශරීරයක් තුළ තිබෙන අපවිත්‍ර දේවල් ගොඩක්ම යි. ඇස්වලින් කඳූළු ගලනවා. කබ ගලනවා. කණින් කලාඳූරු ගලනවා. නාසයෙන් සොටු ගලනවා. කටින් කෙළ ගලනවා. ඇඟෙන් දහඩිය ගලනවා. මල මූත්‍ර ගලනවා. මේවා හැර මේ සිරුරින් කවදාවත් සුවඳක් හමන්නේ නැහැ. අපවිත්‍ර දේවල් පිරුණු අලංකාර භාජනයක් වගේ. ඒ පිට ඔපයට තමයි සියළු දෙනාම රැවටෙන්නේ. රහතන් වහන්සේලාට, නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගැන මහත් අනුකම්පාවක් හට ගත්තා. ස්ත්‍රියක ගේ රුවට වසඟ වී සිතෙහි හටගත් රාගයට මුලා වී අමාරුවේ වැටෙන්නයි යන්නේ ආයෙ ආයෙමත් මැරෙන උපදින සංසාරෙටම යි වැටෙන්න යන්නේ. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේට නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ මේ කලකිරීම ගැන සැළ කළා. එදා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේට අඬගසා වදාළා. “පින්වත් නන්ද, මෙහෙ එන්න ... අපි ගමනක් යමු” කියලා නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ අතින් අල්ලා ගත්තා. එතකොට ම බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ සමඟ දෙව්ලොව පහළ වුණා. නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේට හරිම පුදුම යි. “ෂා ...! එහෙනම් මේක තමයි දිව්‍ය ලෝකෙ කියන්නේ. හා ... හරීම පුදුම යි. අන්න ... අන්න ... දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් එනවා. අන්න .. දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් එන්නේ මේ පැත්තට යි. ෂා ..! හරී ම ලස්සන යි. හිස කෙස් රන්වන් පාට යි. දෑස් නිල්වන් පාට යි. පාවල යටිපතුල් රෝසපාට යි. හැබෑ ම ලස්සන යි.” නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ අසංවර හිතට වැටහුණේ මේ දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් ගේ රූප ශෝභාව විතරම යි. නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ පුදුමයෙන් වගේ බලාගෙන හිටියා. ඒ දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් හැමෝ ම ඈත සිටන් ම බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේට වන්දනා කරමින් නැමි නැමී ආවා. ඉතාමත් ආදර ගෞරවයෙන් වන්දනා කළා. කථාබස් කළා. නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ සිත ඒ දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් කෙරෙහි මුළුමණින් ම වසඟ වුණා. ඊට පස්සේ බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ආයෙමත් නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ අතින් අල්ලා ගත්තා. වේළුවනාරාමයෙහි පහළ වුණා. නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ දෑස් ලොකු කර ගෙන බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ දිහා ඇස් පිය නො හෙළා බලා සිටියා. “පින්වත් නන්ද, දැන් ඔබට මොකක් ද හිතෙන්නේ? වඩාත් ම ලස්සන කවුද? ජනපද කල්‍යාණි ද? දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් ද?” “ස්වාමීනී, භාග්‍යවතුන් වහන්ස, මට තවමත් පුදුම යි. තවමත් සිතා ගන්න බැහැ. තවමත් සිහිනයක් වගේ. එතරම් ම ලස්සන අප්සරාවන් මේ ලෝකේ ඉන්නවා ද කියලා මං දෙව්ලොව යනකල් ම දැන ගෙන හිටියේ නැහැ. ස්වාමීනී, මේ දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් ගැන සිතත් දී ජනපද කල්‍යාණි ගැන මට හිතෙන්නේ හේනක පිලිස්සුනු වැඳිරියක් වගේ කියල යි. අප හිතන තරම් ලස්සනක් මිනිස් ශරීරවල නැහැ. ඒක තේරෙන්නේ දිව්‍ය ශරීර දැක්ක විට යි.” “එහෙමනම් පින්වත් නන්ද, මා ඔබට පොරොන්දු වෙන්නම්. මා කියන ආකාරයට මා දෙන උපදෙස් පරිදි ඔබ සිල් රැක්කොත් ධර්මයෙහි හැසිරුණොත් ඔබ දෙව්ලොව උපදීවි. එතකොට ඔය අප්සරාවන් පන්සියයක පිරිවරක් ඔබට ලැබේ වි.” නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ පුදුමයෙන් පුදුමයට පත් වුණා. සතුටින් හිනා ගියා. වචන පැටළුනා. “ස් .. ස්වාමීනී, .... ඇ ..... ඇත්තට ම ද? ඕක ඇත්තක් ම ද? දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් පන්සියයක් ම ලැබෙනවා ද?” “ඔව් පින්වත් නන්ද, දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් පන්සියයක් ම ලැබෙනවා.” නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ තුන් වතාවක් ම අහලා තහවුරු කරගත්තා. ආයෙනම් සිවුරු අරින්නේ නැහැ කියලා සිත දැඩි කරගත්තා. සිල්පද ටික පිරිසිදුවට රැකගන්නවා කියල අදිටන් කර ගත්තා. ලස්සන සිවුරු අත්හැරියා. පාංසකූල සිවුරක් පොරොවා ගත්තා. මැටි පාත්‍රයක් අතට ගත්තා. ඇස්වල තවරාගෙන සිටි අඳූන් සෝදල දැම්මා. සාමාන්‍ය පැවිද්දෙක් බවට පත් වුණා. හැමෝට ම පුදුම යි. කොහොම ද මේ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ මෙතරම් ඉක්මණින් වෙනස් වුණේ? ටිකෙන් ටික ආරංචි වුණා. ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේගෙන් සිනහ වෙවී ප්‍රශ්න කළා. “හා ... ආයුෂ්මත් නන්දයන් ගණුදෙණුවක් කරගත්ත නේද? කුලියට සිල් රකිනවා නේද? මහණකමත් අඩුමිලට දෙනවා නේද? දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් පතා ගෙන බඹසර රකිනවා නේද?” රහතන් වහන්සේලා ගේ මේ කථාබහ අසා නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ලැජ්ජාවට පත් වුණා. දිව්‍ය අප්සරාවන් ගැන සිතන කොටත් පිළිකුළක් ඇති වුණා. එපා වුණා. අන්තිමේ දී උන්වහන්සේ හුදෙකලා වුණා. සමාධිය දියුණු කළා. කෙලෙස් දුරු කරන වීරිය ඇති කරගත්තා. සිත රැකගත්තා. ධර්මයට පැමිණුනා. සියළු කෙලෙසුන් දුරු කරලා රහතන් වහන්සේ නමක් බවට පත් වුණා. බාහිර දෙයට ආශා කිරීම නිසා බොහෝ පීඩා වින්ඳ නන්ද ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ජයගත්තා. ආශාව පරාජයට පත් වුණා. මෙය නිමිති කොට බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ලස්සන ගාථා දෙකක් මේ අයුරින් වදාළා.

යථාගාරං දුච්ඡන්නං වුට්ඪි සමතිවිජ්ක්ධති
ඒවං අභාවිතං චිත්තං රාගෝ සමතිවිජ්ක්ධති

තේරුම:

නිසි අයුරින් පිළිවෙලකට - වහළ සෙවිලි කොට නැතිවිට
වැසිවසිනා කාලෙට ඒ - වහළින් ගෙට ගලයි වතුර
භාවනාව තුළින් හොඳට - සිත රැකගෙන නො මැති කලට
සංවරකම නැති එසිතට - ගලයි රාග කෙලෙස් කසට

යථාගාරං සුච්ඡන්නං වුට්ඪි න සමතිවිජ්ක්ධති
ඒවං සුභාවිතං චිත්තං රාගෝ න සමතිවිජ්ක්ධති

තේරුම:

නිසි අයුරින් පිළිවෙලකට - වහළ සෙවිලි කොට ඇතිවිට
වැසිවසිනා කාලෙට ඒ - වහළින් ගෙට නො එයි වතුර
භාවනාව තුළින් හොඳට - සිත රැකගෙන සිටිනා විට
සංවර වී තිබෙන සිතට - නො එයි රාග කෙලෙස් කසට

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, නො වටිනා දෙයට ආශා කිරීම නිසා බොහෝ දෙනෙකුට වටිනා දේවල් අහිමි වෙනවා. සමහරුන් සෙල්ලමට ආශයි. ඒ නිසා ම අධ්‍යාපනය අහිමි කරගන්නවා. දියුණු වෙන්න තියෙන මාර්ග නැති කරගන්නවා. අන්තිමේ දී පසු තැවි තැවී ඉන්නවා. සමහරු ඉගෙන ගන්න කාලෙ ප්‍රේම සම්බන්ධතා ඇති කරගන්නවා. ඒව ගැන ම කථාබස් කර කර ඉන්නවා. ඒ තුළින් ම සතුටු වෙවී ඉන්නවා. අන්තිමේ දී ඒ නිසා ම දුකට පත්වෙනවා. විභාග අසමත් වෙනවා. රැකීරක්ෂාවල් නැති කරගන්නවා. සමහරු මත්පැන්වලට ආශා කරනවා. උත්සවවල දී මත්පැන් බීලා ආඩම්බරයෙන් නටනවා. පිරිස මැද්දේ කැපී පෙනෙන්න මහන්සි ගන්නවා. මහා ලොකු වීරකමක් කියල හිතාගෙන බොන්න පටන් ගන්නවා. අන්තිමේ දී බේබද්දෙක් වෙනවා. මිල මුදල් නාස්ති කරගන්නවා. පව්කාර යාළු මිත්‍රයන් පිරිවරාගන්නවා. ශරීර සෞඛ්‍ය විනාශ කරගන්නවා. ශෝක වෙවී ජීවිතය අවසන් කරනවා. සමහරුන් සතුන් මරන්න ආශයි. මේ නිසා ම දඩයමේ යනවා. මාළු අල්ලනවා. සතුන්ට වද දෙනවා. මේ හැමදෙයින් ම සිත පිරිහෙනවා. ඇත්තෙන්ම පිරිහුණු සිතක් තියෙන නිසා ම යි මෙවැනි දෙය සිතට ඇතුළු වෙන්නේ. වහලේ හොඳට හෙවිළි කරලා නැතිනම්, වැස්ස වහින විට වහළයේ ඒ සිදුරු අතරින් ගෙට වතුර ගලන එක නවත්වාගන්නේ කොහො ම ද? පිරිහුණු සිතක් ඇති කෙනා ගේ සිතට පවිටු ආශාවල් ඇති වෙන කොට වළක්වාගන්නේ කොහොම ද? ඒක ඉතාම අමාරු දෙයක්. මේ ලෝකයේ බොහෝ දෙනෙක් ජීවත් වෙන්නේ සිතට රැකවරණයක් නැතුව යි. ඒ නිසා තමන් ගේ සිතේ කෙලෙස් ඇති වෙලා ඒ කෙලෙස් විසින් තමා ව විනාශ කර දමන්නේ තමා නො දැන සිටිද්දිම යි. ඒ තරම් භයානක යි.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, දහම තුළ රැකගත් සිත හරිම අසිරිමත්. ඒ සිත පූජනීය යි. බාහිර කෙනෙකුට මොන ම ක්‍රමයකටවත් ඒ පිරිසිදුකම නැති කරන්න බැහැ. සිත අපිරිසිදු වෙන්නේ රාගය, ද්වේශය, මුලාව ආඩම්බරකම, ඊර්ෂ්‍යයාව, පලිගැනීම, එකට එක කිරීම, ගුණමකුකම, කෙලෙහිගුණ නො දැනීම ආදී දේවල්වලිනුයි. සිත පිරිසිදු වෙන්නෙත් ඔවැනි දේ දුරු කිරීමෙනුයි. එතකොට සංවරකම, සිහිනුවණ, වීරිය, ගුණවත්කම, නිහතමානීකම, නො ඇලීම, මෛත්‍රිය ආදී උසස් දේවල් සිත තුළ වැඩෙනවා. එයින් තමයි රැකවරණය ලැබෙන්නේ. නිවසක වුණත් වහළය හොඳින් සෙවිලි කොට තිබෙනවා නම්, කොයිතරම් වැස්සත් ප්‍රශ්නයක් නැහැ. ඒ වැස්සෙන් ගේ ඇතුළ තෙමෙන්නේ නැහැ. ධර්මය තුළින් රැකවරණය ලැබූ සිත අන්න ඒ වගේ ම යි. යහපතක් ම සැළසෙනවා. අයහපතින් වළකිනවා.

චක්ඛුපාල තෙරුන් ගේ කථාව - කළ පව් පල දෙන හැටි හරි පුදුමයි

2008-04-17T00:47:00.000-07:00

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, අපේ බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ සැවැත් නුවර වැඩසිටිද්දී උපාලි නම් පින්වතෙක් සසර දුකෙන් මිදෙන අදහසින් පැවිදි වුණා. ඊට පස්සේ ධර්ම විනය ඉගෙන ගෙන තවත් ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා සමඟ ඈත පළාතක භාවනා කිරීමට පිටත් වුණා. එහිදී ඒ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේට නිදි නො ලබා භාවනා කිරීම නිසා ඇස් රෝගයක් හට ගත්තා. වෙදමහත්තයා කිව්වේ ඇහැට බෙහෙත් දමද්දී ඇඳේ හාන්සි වෙන්න කියලයි. බෙහෙත් අතටගත් ඒ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ කල්පනා කරන්න පටන් ගත්තා. “මං සංසාරෙ කොයිතරම් මේ ඇස් නිසා දුක් විඳින්න ඇද්ද ... බෙහෙත් දම දමා කොතරම් මහන්සියකින් ඇස් දෙක සනීප කිරීමට වෙහෙස ගන්ට ඇද්ද ... නමුත් මට කිසිකලෙක දී නුවණැස පාදන උතුම් ශ්‍රී සද්ධර්මය මේ ලෙසින් ලැබුණේ නෑ. උතුම් බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ වැඩසිටිද්දී මට න කරන්නේ මේ ධර්මය අවබෝධ කරගැනීම විතරයි. ඒ නිසා වස් වසන්න කලින් මං අධිෂ්ඨාන කර ගත් විදිහට අරහත්වයට පත් නො වී මිසක් ඇඳක හාන්සි වෙන්නේ නැහැ” කියලා හිටගෙන ම යි ඇස් බෙහෙත් දැම්මේ. තමන් ගේ අධිෂ්ඨානය රැක ගන්න න නිසා වෙද මහත්මයා ගේ කීම ඇහුවේ නැහැ. මේ නිසා බෙහෙත්වලින් සුව ලැබුණේ නැහැ. වෙද මහත්මයා බෙහෙත් කිරීම අත්හැරියා. අන්තිමේ දී උන්වහන්සේ අරහත්වයට පත් වෙන කොට ඇස් දෙකම අන්ධ වුණා. ඒ නිසා උන්වහන්සේට ප්‍රසිද්ධ වුණේ චක්ඛුපාල යන නමින්. රහත් වෙන්න පින තිබුණත්, ඇස් අන්ධ වුණේ මක් නිසා ද? කියා අනෙක් ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේගෙන් ඇසුවා. එවේලෙහි බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ මේ ගාථාව වදාළා.

මනෝපුබ්බංගමා ධම්මා මනෝසෙට්ඨා මනෝමයා
මනසා චේ පදුට්ඨේන භාසති වා කරෝති වා
තතෝ නං දුක්ඛමන්වේති චක්කංව වහතෝ පදං

තේරුම:

කරන සියළු පින පවට ම - සිත මුල් වෙනවා හැම විට
පෙරට ම එනවා ඒ සිත - සිතෙන් හැදෙනවා සියල්ල

කෙනෙක් නපුරු සිතින් යුතුව - වචනෙන් පව් කරනා විට
නපුරු ලෙසට යොදවා සිත - කයෙනුත් පව් කරන කලට

පල දෙනවා ම යි ඒ පව - එනවා දුක ඔහු පසුපස
ගැල බැඳි ගවයා පසුපස - රෝදය කැරකෙන විලසට

ඉතින් දරුවනේ ඔය ගාථාව වදාළ බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ කිසිවෙක් නො දන්නා අතීත සිදු වීමක් මේ ඇස් අන්ධ වීමට බලපා තිබෙන බව පෙන්වා දුන්නා. ඈත අතීත කාලයක චක්ඛුපාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ වෙද මහත්තයෙක් වෙලා සිටියා. ඇස් නො පෙනෙන දුප්පත් ගැහැණියක් ඇවිදින් ඒ වෙද මහත්තයාට මෙහෙම කිව්වා “අනේ පින්වත් වෙද මහත්තයෝ, මගේ ඇස් දෙක සනීප කරල දෙන්න. එතකොට මං දාසියක් වගේ ඔබ ළඟ සේවය කරනවා.” මෙය විශ්වාස කළ වෙද මහතා ඇය ගේ ඇස් දෙක සනීප කළා. දාසියක් වීමට අකමැති වූ ඇය ඇස් නො පෙනෙන අයුරක් පෙන්වා වෙද මහතා ගේ බෙහෙතෙන් සනීප නො වුණ බවට බොරු කිව්වා. වෙද මහතාට හරියට තරහ ගියා. “මං තිගේ ඇස් දෙක අන්ධ කරල දානවා” කියලා වෛර බැඳගත්තා. ආයෙමත් ඒ ගැහැණිය කැඳවා ඇස් අන්ධ වෙන බෙහෙතක් දුන්නා. ඒ බෙහෙතෙන් ඇය අන්ධ වුණා. වෙද මහතාට හරි සතුටු යි. නපුරු සිතින් පව්කමක් කොට කොතරම් සතුටු වුණත්, ඒ පව පස්සෙන් ඇවිදින් විපාක දෙන විදිහ හරි පුදුමයි. පවක් පල දෙන කොට එයින් සැපයක් ලැබෙන්නේ නැහැ. එයින් ලැබෙන්නේ දුකම යි.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, ඒ නිසා කයින් කෙරෙන පව් වන සතුන් මැරීම, අන්සතු දෙය සොරකම් කිරීම, අශීලාචාර විදිහේ ජීවිතයක් ගෙවීම හා මත්පැන් බීම ආදිය කිසිසේත් ම කරන්න එපා. ඒ වගේ ම බොරු කියා අනුන් රැවටීම, කේලාම් කියා රණ්ඩු දබර ඇති කිරීම, නරක නපුරු වචන කථා කිරීම, වැඩකට නැති හිස් දේවල් කථා කිරීම අයිති වන්නේ වචනයෙන් කෙරෙන පව්වලට යි. අනුන් ගේ දෙයට ආශා කොට ඊර්ෂ්‍යා කිරීම, ක්‍රෝධ කිරීම, වෛර කිරීම, පින්පව් විශ්වාස නො කිරීම ආදිය අයිති වන්නේ සිතෙන් කෙරෙන පව්වලට යි. එවැනි සිතකින් පවක් කළෝතින්, පව් දෙයක් කිව්වෝතින්, ඔයාල ගෙ පස්සෙනුත් ඒවයේ විපාක පැමිණේවි. කරත්තෙ බැඳපු ගොනෙකු ගේ පිටිපස්සෙන් රෝදෙ කැරකෙනවා වගේ විපාකත් පැමිණේවි. ඒ නිසා හොඳ ම දෙය පව්වලින් වැළකීම ම යි.

චුල්ලකාල මහාකාල තෙරුන් වහන්සේලා ගේ කථාව

2008-04-17T00:05:00.000-07:00

අසංවර වූ හීන වීරිය ඇති කෙනා කිසි දියුණුවක් ලබන්ට බැහැ. සංවර වූ වීරියවන්ත කෙනා හැම දෙය ම ජය ගන්නවා.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, ඒ කාලයේ සේතව්‍ය කියල නගරයක් තියෙනවා. එහි මහාකාල, මජ්ක්ධිම කාල, චුල්ල කාල කියල පුතාල තුන් දෙනෙක් සිටින පවුලක් හිටියා. ඔවුන් රැකියාවට කළේ වෙළදාමයි. වෙළදාම නිසා ඔවුන් ගේ අතමිට සරු වුණා. මහා ධනවතුන් වුණා. එක් කාලෙක මහාකාල නම් වූ වැඩිමහළු සොහොයුරාත්, චුල්ල කාල නම් වූ බාල සොහොයුරාත් වෙළඳාම පිණිස සැවැත් නුවරට පැමිණියා. සැවැත් නුවර දී මේ වෙළඳ සොහොයුරන්ට බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ගැන අසන්ට ලැබුණා. මුළු නගරය ම සාමකාමි යි. බොහෝ නිවෙස්වල සවස් යාමයේ තෙරුවන් වන්දනා කොට භාවනා කරනවා. බණකථා අසනවා. හරිම ප්‍රීතියෙන් කල් ගෙවනවා. මේ වෙනස ගැන වෙළඳ සොහොයුරන් පුදුමයට පත් වුණා. ඔවුන්ටත් සැවැත් නුවර ජේතවනාරාමයට යන්නට ආශා හිතුනා. දිනක් සවස් යාමයේ මේ දෙදෙනා දෙව්රම් වෙහෙරට ගියා. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේව දැක ගත්තා.

එදා බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ඉතාම ලස්සනට උතුම් ධර්මය කියා දුන්නා. මේ ඉපදෙන මැරෙන සසර ගමන ඉතාම භයානකයි. සිතේ ඇති වෙන ලෝභයත්, ද්වේශයත්, මුලාවත් නිසා සත්වයන් කෙලෙසී යනවා. එසේ කෙලෙසී ගිය මිනිසුන් සිත කය වචනය යන තිදොරින් කර්ම රැස්කොට අපායෙහි ඉපදෙනවා. නමුත් චතුරාර්ය සත්‍ය ධර්මය අවබෝධ කරගත්තොත් මේ ප්‍රශ්නය විසඳාගන්න පුළුවනි. හැබැයි කෙනෙකුට ඒ වෙනුවෙන් මුළු ජීවිතයම කැප කළොත් ලෝභ, ද්වේශ, මෝහ යන අකුසල්වලින් සම්පූර්ණයෙන් ම නිදහස් වෙන්න පුළුවනි. සාමාන්‍ය ගිහි ජීවිතයක් ගත කරමින් ආර්ය අෂ්ටාංගික මාර්ගය පුරුදු කරද්දී සෑහෙන වෙහෙසක් ගන්න වෙනවා. ඒකට හේතුව කාමසැපයට ම යි ගිහි ජීවිතය තියෙන්නේ. කෙලෙස් උපදින මාවතක් වගෙයි. හැමතිස්සේ ම මොකක් හරි දෙයකට හිත බැඳිල යනවා. ඒ වුණාට මේ පැවිදි ජීවිතය නම් හරීම නිදහස්. ආකාශය වගෙයි.

මේ වෙළඳ සොහොයුරන් දෙදෙනා බණ අසාගෙන සිටියා. මහාකාල හිටියේ ඉතාම හොඳින් සවන් දීගෙන යි. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ වදාළ හැම බණ පදයක් ම මෙයාට අවබෝධ වුණා. මෙතරම් උතුම් අවස්ථාවක් ආයෙ කවදාවත් ලැබෙන එකක් නැහැ කියලා මෙයාට තේරුණා. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ධර්මය දේශනා කරලා ගන්ධ කුටියට වැඩියා. මහාකාල ලොකු කල්පනාවකට වැටුණා. එයා චුල්ලකාලට මෙහෙම කිව්වා. “මල්ලියේ, ඔයා ගෙදර යන්න. වෙළහෙළඳාම් කටයුතු කර ගන්න. අනෙක් අයට හොඳින් සළකන්න. මං මහණ වෙනවා. මං ආයෙමත් ගිහි ගෙදරට බැඳෙන්නේ නැහැ. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේව මුණ ගැසුන වෙලාවේ මේ ලැබුණ දුර්ලභ අවස්ථාව අත්හැරගන්න මම කැමැති නැහැ.” “එහෙම කොහොම ද? එතකොට ඒ අක්කලාට මං මොකක් ද කියන්නේ? දරුවන්ට මං මොනවා ද කියන්නේ? අපි මෙච්චර මහන්සියෙන් කරපු ව්‍යාපාර කඩාකප්පල් කරන්න ද ඔයා හදන්නෙ? අනික ඔය නතරම් ගිහි ගෙදර ඉදගෙන මිනිසුන් ධර්මයෙහි හැසිරෙන්නේ. ඉතින් ඔයාටත් පුළුවන්නෙ එහෙම කරන්න.” “නෑ මල්ලියේ, මිනිසුන් ඕන කෙනෙක් එහෙම කරපුවාවේ. මට න ඒක නොවෙයි. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ ගිහි ජීවිතය අත්හැරලා පැවිදි ජීවිතයක් ගත කරගෙන නිවන හොයාගෙන ගියා. උන්වහන්සේ ධර්මය අවබෝධ කළා. මේ ජීවිතය තුළ දී ම ඒ නිවන අවබෝධ කිරීම පිණිස පැවිදි ජීවිතයේ වටිනාකම පෙන්වලා දුන්නා. ඉතින් මේ අවස්ථාව මට මඟහැරුණොත් ආයෙ ආයෙමත් මට උපදින්න සිද්ධ වේවි. ඒ නිසා මල්ලියේ මං නැවත ගෙදර යන්න කොහෙත්ම කැමැති නෑ. මං මේ සෑම දෙයක් ම අත්හරිනවා. මට ඕන කරන්නේ මේ චතුරාර්ය සත්‍ය ධර්මය අවබෝධ කිරීම විතරයි.” අය්යයි මල්ලියි දෙන්නා ඔය විදිහට වාද කළා. අන්තිමේ දී අය්යා ජය ගත්තා. මල්ලි කල්පනා කළේ වෙන දෙයක්. “ඔව්, අය්යා මහණ වුණාට කමක් නෑ. පැවිදි වීම කියන්නේ හොඳ දෙයක් නෙ. අය්යත් මහණ වෙනවා නම්, මං විතරක් තනියම ආපහු යන්නේ මොකට ද? එහෙම නම් මමත් මහණ වෙනවා” කියල හිතාගෙන එයා මහාකාලට මෙහෙම කිව්වා. “ඔව් අය්යේ, ඔයා හරි කොහොම වුණත් අපි කවුරුත් වයසට ගිහින් මැරිලා යනවා නෙ. අපි කරපු පින්පව් අරගෙන යනවා නෙ. ඉතින් මේ හැම දෙයක් ම මේ ජීවිතයේ අවසන් කරලා නිවන අවබෝධ කරන එක හොඳයි කියලා මමත් කල්පනා කළා.” මහාකාලට හරිම සතුටුයි. එයා මල්ලිව සතුටින් වැළඳගත්තා. ඒ දෙදෙනා ඉතාමත් සතුටින් පැවිදි වුණා.

පැවිදි වුණාට පසු මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ඒ ගැන ඉතාමත් වගකීම් සහිතව කල්පනා කළා. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ උගන්වන ආකාරයට ම සිත කය වචනය හසුරුවන්නට ඕන කියල දැඩි ලෙස අධිෂ්ඨාන කරගත්තා. කළණ මිතුරන් ගේ ඇසුරේ ම කල්ගත කරන්න හිතට ගත්තා. ඒ නිසා මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ඉතාම සිල්වත් කෙනෙක් වුණා. ඇස් කණ් ආදී ඉඳූරන් හොඳට සංවර කරගත්තා. දමනය වුණා. හිත ඇවිස්සෙන ලාමක දේවල්වලට ඉඩ දුන්නේ නැහැ. දානය වැළඳූවෙත් ජීවිතය පවත්වා ගැනීම විතරම යි. රස තෘෂ්ණාවට හසු වුණෙත් නැහැ. ශ්‍රද්ධාව හොඳින් පැවැත්වුවා. ගෙවෙන හැම තත්පරයකින් ම උපරිම ප්‍රයෝජන ගත්තා. වීරියවන්ත වුණා. සමාධිය දියුණු කළා. සුළු කලක දී අකම්පිත සිත් ඇති රහතන් වහන්සේ නමක් බවට පත් වුණා. නමුත් චුල්ලකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ජීවිතයේ ඇති බැරෑරුම්කම ගැන කල්පනා කළේ නෑ. කම්මැලිකමෙන් කල්ගත කළා. හොඳට නිදාගත්තා. ප්‍රණීත ආහාරපාන ලැබුණ දවසට හොඳට වැළඳූවා. ඇතිපදමට වැළඳූවා. ආයෙමත් නිදාගත්තා. ගිහි ගෙවල්වල ජීවත් වෙන උදවිය දිහාබල බලා සතුටුවුණා. භාවනා කරන්න උත්සාහ ගත්තේ නෑ. ඉඳූරන් සංවර කරගත්තේ නෑ.

දිනක් පන්සියයක් ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා පිරිවරාගෙන බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ සේතව්‍ය නුවරට වැඩම කළා. සේතව්‍ය නුවර ඇට්ටේරියා වනයෙහි වැඩසිටියා. ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලා පිඬුසිඟා වඩිද්දී මේ මහාකාල චුල්ලකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේලාව ඒ නගරයේ වැසියන් හඳූනාගත්තා. ඔවුන් ගේ නිවසට දැනුම් දුන්නා. දිනක් චුල්ලකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේට ගෙදර දානයට ඇරැයුමක් ලැබුණා. ඒ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ සතුටින් ගෙදරට වැඩියා. දන්වළඳා අවසානයේ ධර්මය දේශනා කළා. පින් අනුමෝදන් කොට ආපසු වැඩම කිරීම පිණිස අසුණෙන් නැගිට්ටා. එතකොට ඒ ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ ගිහිකල බිරින්දෑවරුන් ඇවිදින් වට කරගත්තා. “හා .... හා ... මේ මොක ද? දැන්ම ම පිටත් වෙන්න ද හදන්නෙ? මෙච්චරකලක් මුන්දැලාට මොකද වුණේ කියල සොයාගන්නට බැරිවයි හිටියේ. දැන් ඉතින් කොහේ යන්න ද? ආ ... මේ සරම ගන්නවා. හා ... කෝ ... ඔය සිවුර අයින් කරන එක යි ඇත්තේ” චුල්ලකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ හොඳට ම බිය වුණා. පැනල යන්න ලැබුණේ නැහැ. ඒ භාර්යාවන් උන්වහන්සේව බලෙන් ම සිවුරු හැරෙව්වා. ගිහි රෙදි ඇන්ඳෙව්වා. දැන් පවුලේ උදවියට හරිම සතුටුයි. මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ ගෙදර පිරිසටත් චුල්ලකාල සිවුරු හැරීම ගැන ආරංචි වුණා. ඔවුන්ට හරි සතුටුයි. “හරි ... අපේ එක්කෙනාට කරන්න තියෙන්නෙත් ඔය ටික ම තමයි.” ඔවුන් පසුව දා ම මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ සොයා ගොස් දානයට ආරාධනා කළා. ඒ ඇරැයුම පිළිගත් මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ පසුව දා එම නිවසට වැඩම කළා. පිළිගැන්වූ දානය වැළඳූවා. අනුමෝදනා බණ දේශනා කළා. ආපසු වඩින්නට සිතා ගෙන අසුණෙන් නැගිට්ටා. ඒ මොහොතේ ම මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ ගේ ගිහිකල බිරින්දෑවරු සඟවාගෙන සිටි ගිහි ඇඳූම් අතට ගෙන උන්වහන්සේව වට කරගත්තා. “හා ... හා ... ආපහු වඩින්න වගේ. ඒව කොහේද ... දැන් ඉතින් මේ වතුපිටි බලාගෙන මල්ලිත් එක්ක වෙළහෙළඳාම් කරගෙන ඉන්න එකයි ඇත්තෙ.” මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ නිශ්ශබ්ද වුණා. දෑස පියාගත්තා. කෙමෙන් කෙමෙන් පොළොවෙන් උඩට ඉස්සුනා. බිරින්දෑවරුන් පස්සට වීසි වුණා. ඇස් ලොකු වුණා. පුදුමෙන් වගේ බලාගෙන හිටියා. මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේ පොළොවෙන් උඩට නැගී අහසින් වැඩියා. සියළු දෙනා දෑත් වැඳගෙන ඒ දෙස බලා සිටියා. උන්වහන්සේ නො පෙනී ගියා. බිරින්දෑවරුන් එකිනෙකා බිරාන්ත වෙලා මූණට මූණ බලාගත්තා.

මහාකාල ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේට වන්දනා කළා. “ස්වාමීනී, භාග්‍යවතුන් වහන්ස, අප ගේ සහෝදර ස්වාමීන් වහන්සේව බලෙන් සිවුරු හරවා ගත්තා” කියා පවසා සිටියා. එවේලෙහි භාග්‍යවත් බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ මේ ගාථා දෙක වදාළා.

සුභානුපස්සිං විහරන්තං ඉන්ද්‍රියේසු අසංවුතං
භෝජනම්හි අමත්තඤ්ඤුං කුසීතං හීනවීරියං
තං වේ පසහති මාරෝ වාතෝ රුක්ඛංව දුබ්බලං

තේරුම:

සංවර ඉඳූරන් නො මැතිව - ලස්සන දෙය ගැන රැවටී
ගන්නා ආහාරය ගැන - අරුත නො දැන එහි ගිජු වී
භාවනාව ගැන නො සිතා - කම්මැලි ලෙස කල් ගෙවනා
කෙනා නිතර වැටෙන්නේ ම - දුකින් පිරුණු ලෝකයට ය
හමනා විට තදින් සුළඟ - කඩා වැටෙයි දුර්වල ගස
මාරයා දමයි ඔහු ඇද - ඉපදෙන මැරෙනා ලෝකෙට

අසුභානුපස්සිං විහරන්තං ඉන්ද්‍රියේසු සුසංවුතං
භෝජනම්හි ච මත්තඤ්ඤුං සද්ධං ආරද්ධවීරියං
තං වේ නප්පසහති මාරෝ වාතෝ සේලංව පබ්බතං

තේරුම:

සංවර වූ ඉඳූරන් ඇති - ලොවෙහි සැබෑ තතු දකිනා
ගන්නා ආහාරය ගැන - අරුත ද හඳූනා සිටිනා
සැදැහැ සිතින් යුතුව හොඳින් - වීරිය වඩමින් නිතරම
දහම විනය තුළ සිටිනා - භාවනාව කරන කෙනා
යට කරන්න බැහැ කිසිවිට - මාරයාට ඔහු ගෙ ගමන
තදින් සුළඟ හමා ගිය ද - නො සැලේ ගල්කුල කිසි විට

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, ජීවිතය ජය ගන්නේ ඉතාමත් සුළු පිරිස යි. බොහෝ දෙනෙක් පරාජයට පත් වෙනවා. සාමාන්‍ය ලෝකයා මුදල් තිබීම, යානවාහන තිබීම, ඉඩකඩම් වතුපිටි තිබීම, ලොකු සමාජ තත්වයක් තිබීම, ජයග්‍රහණය හැටියට සළකනවා. එය යම් කිසි ජයග්‍රහණයක් තමයි. නමුත් ජීවිතයක ලොකුම ජයග්‍රහණය වන්නේ චතුරාර්ය සත්‍යය අවබෝධ කිරීම ය. ඒත් එය අවබෝධ කළ හැක්කේ කාටද යන්න වග අටවෙනි ගාථාවෙන් හොඳින් ම පැහැදිලි වෙනවා.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, වීරිය නැති, කාමසැපයෙහි ඇළුණු, ඉඳූරන අසංවර තැනැත්තා මේ ලෝකයට බැඳෙන්නේ සිතාගත නො හැකි වේගයෙනි. බුදු රජාණන් වහන්සේ එය පෙන්වා වදාළේ සුළඟින් කඩා වැටෙන දුබල ගසක් ලෙස ය. මාරයා ඒ තැනැත්තාව වසඟ කරන්නේ ඔහු තුළ ඇති දුර්වලකම් පාදක කොට ගෙන ය. මාරයා යනු මේ ලෝකයෙහි පැවැත්ම හෙවත් ඇස, කන, නාසය, දිව, කය, මනස යන සයෙහි පැවැත්මට අධිපති තැනැත්තා ය. චතුරාර්ය සත්‍යය අවබෝධය යනු ඒ ඇස්කණ් ආදියෙන් නිදහස් වීම යි. එසේ ජීවිතාවබෝධය තුළින් තණ්හාවෙන් නිදහස් වීම ගැන මාරයා කැමැති නැත. ඔහු නිතරම කැමැති වන්නේ පුද්ගලයා ඇස, කණ, නාසය, දිව, කය, මනස යන හයට බැඳී සිටීම ගැන යි. ඒ නිසා හත්වෙනි ගාථාවෙහි සඳහන් දුර්වලතාවලින් හෙබි පුද්ගලයාව එයට බැඳ තැබීම සුළු දෙයකි. ඔහු වහා එයට හසු වෙයි.

පින්වත් දරුවනේ, රහතන් වහන්සේ ගේ ස්වභාවය කොතරම් අසිරිමත් ද! උන්වහන්සේ කිසිවකට නො ඇලෙයි. උන්වහන්සේ අසුභ දෙය ඒ අයුරින් ම දකිති. ඉඳූරන් සංවර කර ගෙන සිටිති. ලොවෙහි ඇති සියළු රස එකට කැටි කොට රහතන් වහන්සේට පිදුවත් රස තෘෂ්ණාවට උන්වහන්සේ කිසිදා හසු නොවේ. උන්වහන්සේ වැඩ සිටින්නේ තෘෂ්ණාවෙන් නිදහස් වූ කෙනෙක් හැටියට මිස තෘෂ්ණාවෙහි දාසයෙක් ලෙස නොවේ. ඒ රහතන් වහන්සේ ගේ වීරිය හැම මොහොතේ ම පවතී. සිහි නුවණ මැනැවින් පවතී. මාරයාට කිසිසේත් ම උන්වහන්සේව යට කළ නො හැකිය. ඇස, කණ, නාසය, දිව, කය, මනස යන හයෙන් නිදහස් වූ උන්වහන්සේ වැඩ සිටින්නේ මහාගල් පර්වතයක් පරිද්දෙනි. කොතරම් සුළඟ හැමුව ද එය සොළවාලිය නො හැකි ය. මාරයා කවර දෙයක් කළ ද රහතන් වහන්සේව වෙනස් කළ නො හැකි ය. පිරිසිදු සිත් ඇති රහතන් වහන්සේලා බිහි වන්නේ බුදු සසුනක පමණි. බුදුවරුන් ගේ ලෝකයෙහි බබලන්නේ රහතන් වහන්සේලා ය.

Pañcakanga Sutta (Samyutta Nikaya XXXVI.19) : Carpenter Fivetools

2008-04-15T00:03:00.000-07:00

Once Carpenter Fivetools went to see the Venerable Udayi. Having saluted him respectfully, he sat down at one side. Thus seated, he asked the Venerable Udayi:

"How many kinds of feelings, reverend Udayi, were taught by the Blessed One?"

"Three kinds of feelings, Carpenter, were taught by the Blessed One: pleasant, painful and neutral feelings. These are the three feelings taught by the Blessed One."

After these words, Carpenter Fivetools said: "Not three kinds of feelings, reverend Udayi, were taught by the Blessed One. It is two kinds of feelings that were stated by the Blessed One: pleasant and painful feelings. The neutral feeling was said by the Blessed One to belong to peaceful and sublime happiness."

But the Venerable Udayi replied: "It is not two feelings that were taught by the Blessed One, but three: pleasant, painful and neutral feelings."

(This exchange of views was repeated for a second and a third time,) but neither was Carpenter Fivetools able to convince the Venerable Udayi, nor could the Venerable Udayi convince Carpenter Fivetools. It so happened that [the] Venerable Ananda had listened to that conversation and went to see the Blessed One about it. Having saluted the Blessed One respectfully, he sat down at one side. Thus seated, he repeated the entire conversation that had taken place between the Venerable Udayi and Carpenter Fivetools.

The Blessed One said: "Ananda, Udayi's way of presentation, with which Carpenter Fivetools disagreed, was correct, indeed. But also Carpenter Fivetool's way of presentation, with which Udayi disagreed, was correct. In one way of presentation I have spoken of two kinds of feelings, and in other ways of presentation I have spoken of three, of six, of eighteen, of thirty-six, and of one hundred and eight kinds of feelings.[2] So the Dhamma has been shown by me in different ways of presentation.

"Regarding the Dhamma thus shown by me in different ways, if there are those who do not agree with, do not consent to, and do not accept what is rightly said and rightly spoken, it may be expected of them that they will quarrel, and get into arguments and disputes, hurting each other with sharp words.

"Regarding the Dhamma thus shown by me in different ways, if there are those who agree with, consent to, and accept what is rightly said and rightly spoken, it may be expected of them that they will live in concord and amity, without dispute, like milk (that easily mixes) with water, looking at each other with friendly eyes.

"There are five strands of sense desire. What are these five? Forms cognizable by the eye that are wished for, desirable, agreeable and endearing, bound up with sensual desire and tempting to lust. Sounds cognizable by the ear...odors cognizable by the nose...flavors cognizable by the tongue...tangibles cognizable by the body, that are wished for, desirable, agreeable and endearing, bound up with sense desire, and tempting to lust. These are the five strands of sense desire. The pleasure and joy arising dependent on these five strands of sense desire, that is called sensual pleasure.

"Now, if someone were to say: 'This is the highest pleasure and joy that can be experienced,' I would not concede that. And why not? Because there is another kind of pleasure which surpasses that pleasure and is more sublime. And what is this pleasure? Here, quite secluded from sensual desires, secluded from unwholesome states of mind, a monk enters upon and abides in the first meditative absorption (jhana), which is accompanied by thought conception and discursive thinking and has in it joy and pleasure born of seclusion. This is the other kind of pleasure which surpasses that (sense) pleasure and is more sublime.

"If someone were to say: 'This is the highest pleasure that can be experienced,' I would not concede that. And why not? Because there is another kind of pleasure which surpasses that pleasure and is more sublime. And what is that pleasure? Here, with the stilling of thought conception and discursive thinking...a monk enters upon and abides in the second meditative absorption...in the sphere of the infinity of space...of the infinity of consciousness ...of no-thingness...of neither-perception-nor-non-perception.

"If someone were to say: 'This is the highest pleasure that can be experienced,' I would not concede that. And why not? Because there is another kind of pleasure which surpasses that pleasure and is more sublime. And what is this pleasure? Here, by completely surmounting the sphere of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, a monk enters upon and abides in the cessation of perception and feeling. This is the other kind of pleasure which surpasses that pleasure and is more sublime.[3]

"It may happen, Ananda, that Wanderers of other sects will be saying this: 'The recluse Gotama speaks of the Cessation of Perception and Feeling and describes it as pleasure. What is this (pleasure) and how is this (a pleasure)?'

"Those who say so, should be told: 'The Blessed One describes as pleasure not only the feeling of pleasure. But a Tathagata describes as pleasure whenever and whereinsoever it is obtained.'"

Notes

1. This text is identical with MN 59 (Bahuvedaniya Sutta -- Many Kinds of Feelings).

2. See SN XXXVI.22.

3. Comy.: "From the fourth Jhana onwards, it is the neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling (that is present in these meditative states). But this neutral feeling, too, is called 'pleasure' (sukha), on account of its being peaceful and sublime. What arises by way of the five cords of sensual desire and by way of the eight meditative attainments is called 'pleasure as being felt' (vedayita-sukha). The state of Cessation of Perception and Feeling is a 'pleasure, not being felt' (avedayita-sukha). Hence, whether it be pleasure felt or not felt, both are assuredly 'pleasure,' in the sense of their being painfree states (niddukkhabhava-sankhatena sukhena)."

In AN IX.34, the venerable Sariputta exclaims: "Nibbana is happiness, friend; Nibbana is happiness, indeed!" The monk Udayi then asked: "How can there be happiness when there is no feeling?" The venerable Sariputta replied: "Just this is happiness, friend, that therein there is no feeling." The continuation of that Sutta may also be compared with our text. On Nibbana as happiness, see also AN VI.100.

(http://www.vipassana.com)

The Cause of Dukka

2008-04-14T23:26:00.001-07:00

Practicing The Buddha Dhamma As Laymen by Sayagyi U Chit Tin

2008-04-14T23:16:00.000-07:00

In "The Essentials of the Buddha-Dhamma in Meditation Practice," Sayagyi U Ba Khin points out that during the Buddha's lifetime there were around ninety million people living in Savatthi and the neighboring countryside. [1] Of these, approximately fifty million were Ariyas, having reached the first stage of Awakening. We can conclude from these figures that the number of laymen who took to Vipassana (insight meditation) must have been more than those who were in the Orders of Bhikkhus and Bhikkhunis. Laymen of today should therefore be encouraged in their effort to put into practice the Teachings of the Buddha in their everyday lives.
It can be done.

In the collection of the Suttas, there are a number of discourses given by the Buddha to laypeople. Let us look at one given to the Brahman householders of Sala and Veranja. [2] The circumstances of this talk are similar to several others given to laypeople. The people of Sala and Veranja had heard of the Buddha and of his reputation. They approached him with a question often asked by laypeople. They wished to know why some people were reborn in lower planes of existence and why others were reborn in the higher planes.

The Buddha answers this question -- but he also adds that it is possible to aspire to something far greater than heavenly worlds. The Buddha first gave a very concise reply to their question: some people go to lower worlds including the hells because they live un-righteously and live unbalanced lives; some people go to heavenly worlds through living righteously (Dhamma-cariya) and because they live balanced lives (sama-cariya).

The laymen of each town said that they did not understand the full meaning of what the Buddha had said and they requested that he give them a full explanation. The Buddha then explained that unrighteous living --that is to say, not following the Dhamma -- involves wrong actions: unbalanced physical, verbal, and mental actions. On the other hand, righteous living, which follows the Dhamma and is balanced, means actions, which are of the opposite kind. In summarizing the Buddha's discourse, we will emphasize the type of life, which follows the Dhamma.

The Buddha mentions three kinds of actions of the body. Unrighteous and unbalanced living means killing, stealing, and indulging in sensual pleasures -- wrong sexual practices are mentioned in particular. Righteous and balanced living means refraining from killing -- a person will lay aside stick and sword, live scrupulously, and be merciful, kindly and compassionate to all living creatures. Such a person does not take what is not given and he restrains himself from indulging in wrong actions with regard to sensual pleasures. Here the Buddha specifies that a man does not have intercourse with women who are under the protection of others. We can infer from the list that all sexual relations outside of marriage are to be avoided.

There are four kinds of speech. Unrighteous and unbalanced speech includes lies, slander, harsh speech, and frivolous chatter. A person who follows the Dhamma will abandon lying. If he is called as a witness, he will tell what he knows and what he has seen, but if he does not know something, he will say so. He will not intentionally lie for his own sake, for someone else's sake, or in order to obtain material gain.

In avoiding slander, a person will not repeat what he has heard in order to set people against each other. He will work to reconcile those who are disputing and to bring friends close together. He will take pleasure in concord rather than discord. He will delight in concord. It will be a joy to him and will motivate his speech.

In abandoning harsh speech, a person will say what is gentle,pleasing, affectionate, going to the heart, courteous, and pleasant to many people. This is in contrast to the wrong kind of speech, which is rough, hard, severe on others, abusive of others, bordering on wrath and not conducive to concentration.

In contrast to indulging in frivolous chatter, a person will speak,at the right time, in accordance with fact. He will speak about the goal, about the Dhamma, about discipline. What he says will be worth treasuring. His similes will be timely, with a purpose, and related to the goal.

In a discourse to the Bhikkhus, the Buddha distinguished between two kinds of right speech. The first kind of right speech will lead to future lives. It will have taints and will involve clinging to future existence (but it will be on the side of merit). It involves abstaining from the four kinds of wrong speech: lying, slander, harsh speech and gossiping. The second kind of right speech is Noble (Aryan), free of taints, supra mundane and part of the Path to Nibbána. In addition to abstaining from, refraining from, avoidance of and restraint from the four kinds of wrong speech, one should develop the Noble Path through Noble thoughts, thoughts free of the taints, and one should know the Path. [3]

The right actions of body and speech that the Buddha taught to thelaymen of Sala and Veranja are included in the precepts for virtuous living followed by all true Buddhists. The minimum number of precepts, which must be respected at all times, are the five precepts. These include four righteous actions of the body: not killing, not stealing, and abstaining from indulging in sensual pleasures, including adultery and taking intoxicants. The fifth precept is to abstain from lying. So we can see that here, the Buddha gives a more detailed explanation of the control over verbal actions. A group of eight precepts (ajivatthamaka-sila) for laypeople includes these four types of right speech. [4] In addition, there are the three types of right kindly actions the Buddha gave the people of Sala and Veranja and the eighth precept is right livelihood.

Of particular interest in this discourse of the Buddha's is the fact that he speaks of mental actions as well as actions of body and speech. The three kinds of unrighteous and unbalanced thoughts include coveting other people's property, being malevolent and corrupt in thought and purpose, and being of wrong view. (These kinds of thoughts have the three roots of wrong action at their source: greed, hatred and delusion [lobha, dosa, moha].) The absence of these three roots will lead to the three kinds of righteous and balanced thoughts.

A person should not covet other people's property. He should not be malevolent in mind or corrupt in his thoughts and purpose. He should think to himself, "May others be friendly, peaceful, secure, happy, and protect themselves." He should have right view, which includes thinking correctly concerning worldly affairs. He should believe that for a person who gives there will be a future result, that sacrifice will give future results, that actions that are well done or badly done will give appropriate results. He should believe that this world exists, as does a world beyond, that fulfilling one's duty to one's mother and father gives good results, that there are beings who are spontaneously reborn, and that there are those in the world who live correctly and who teach about this world and the world beyond, having understood them with their own higher knowledge.

This development of right thoughts will prove to be useful in doing right actions. A person who is free of desire for other people's property will not steal. Those who are free of hatred will not kill, they will not wish to lie or slander or use harsh words. Those who correctly understand the results of actions will not indulge in these kinds of wrong actions, and they will realize that frivolous talk can only lead to suffering in the future.

The Buddha then told the laymen that through the righteous, balanced living he has just described, a person may be reborn as a rich man or in the Deva and Brahma worlds. Finally, he adds that it can also lead to the highest goal of all, Nibbána. In this way, a person can destroy the taints and enjoy the freedom of mind and freedom through wisdom by his own higher knowledge. So the Buddha, in addition to answering the laymen's question
about what leads to future suffering and future happiness, also gave them a hint that they should strive for freedom from any future world.

Anyone who has tried to control his thoughts, as recommended by the Buddha, will realize that it is very difficult. The most difficult thing in the world, in fact. This is why it is so important that we learn how to concentrate our thoughts. Through mindfulness of breathing (anapana-sati), laypeople today can bring their minds under their own control. The better the control the better they will be able to think the three types of thoughts given by the Buddha and perform good bodily and verbal actions.

Control of thoughts is especially important with regard to speech.At first, we may find that even though we do not exercise complete control we are able to recognize immediately afterwards when we use wrong speech. If we see ourselves more clearly and if we make progress in being honest with ourselves as well as others, we will not try to excuse ourselves and justify our wrong speech. We will face up to our lies. We will admit to ourselves when we are looking for some benefit for ourselves or others. We will also be able to see the effect of our words, and we will see the pain caused if we try to set people against each other. We will soon prefer tolook for a way to use gentle speech rather than say something harsh. We will not have the mistaken view that shouting at others is for their own good.

There may be an occasion when a person will speak to another even though the other person will become angry, but such occasions will be very rare. This will only be when one is sure that through speaking to him the person will be easily convinced of what is said and will be persuaded to give up un-skilful actions and do what is skilful. [5] The Buddha compared this with the compassion of a parent who will be rough with a baby to get
a stick or stone out of its mouth. The important thing in this connection is that one truly knows it is the right time to speak. [6]

An illustration of how difficult it is to know when to speak or not is illustrated in the case of the novice Aricavata. [7] This novice was approached by Prince Jayasena who is described as always pacing up and down and always roaming about. He asked Aricavata if a Bhikkhu who was diligent, ardent and self-resolute could attain one-pointed-ness of mind. Aricavata answered that this was possible. So Prince Jayasena requested that the novice teach him the Dhamma. But the novice hesitated. "If I were to teach you the Dhamma as I have heard it, as I have mastered it," he said, "and if you could not understand the meaning of what I said, that would be wearisome to me, that would be vexing for me." The prince insisted, however, so Aciravata taught him. Then the prince declared that he did not think it was possible for a Bhikkhu to attain one-pointed-ness of mind.

Aciravata went to the Buddha and explained what had happened. The Buddha told him that Prince Jayasena lived surrounded by sensual pleasures. He enjoyed them and was consumed by thoughts of sensual pleasures. He burned with the fever of sensual pleasures and eagerly sought sensual pleasures. Therefore, it was impossible for him to know, see, attain or realize what can be known, seen, attained or realized by renunciation.

The Buddha then pointed out to Aciravata that if he had used appropriate similes, Prince Jayasena would have been able to understand. He should have pointed out that while animals who receive no training will never be tamed, animals who do receive training will be tamed, or he could have used the illustration of two friends who go up to a mountain. One of them then climbs the mountain and describes the parks, woods, level ground and ponds that he can see. His companion does not believe him. So he has the companion climb up to see for himself. As long as the companion was hemmed in by the mountain slope, he could not see what was to be seen.

The novice Aciravata pointed out that since these two similes had only just then been given by the Buddha, he could not have known them and used them in his discussion with Prince Jayasena.

This incident can be a lesson to people who wish to tell others about the Buddha's Teachings. They should not over-estimate their ability to understand how best to explain the Dhamma to others. No one has the ability of the Buddha to know how best to teach others. We can also see the importance of being familiar with the Teachings. The more we understand, the better the chance we will be able to use an appropriate explanation.

The most important lesson to be learned from this discourse, however, is the importance of control over the senses. The restless prince was such a slave to the pleasures of the material world that he could not believe it is possible to control the mind.

The Buddha pointed out in a discourse to a group of Bhikkhus the benefits to be derived from mindfulness of the body. [8] Mindfulness of the body, the Buddha explains, leads to a mind, which is utterly pure and clean, inwardly settled, calmed, focused and concentrated. On the other hand, he warns, if mindfulness of the body is not developed, the leader of negative forces, Mara, will gain access.

It is therefore very important that laypeople be able to control their senses. This will make it possible to follow the precepts and work for happiness in this life and future lives. But more important, it is essential if we are to work for the true happiness of Nibbána.

The Buddha used very telling images to illustrate the sort of control we need in a discourse addressed to Venerable Ánanda. [9] He tells Ánanda that in the development of control over the senses in the discipline for the Noble, the six senses of the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body and mind will be stimulated by shapes, sounds, smells, tastes, touches and mental states which will be either liked, disliked or both liked and disliked. A person should be able to be aware that such sensations are present very quickly. For sights, it should be as quick as opening or closing the eyes. For sounds, it should be as quick as a finger snap; for smells, as quick as raindrops sliding off a lotus leaf that is slightly slanted; for tastes, as quick as spitting; for touches, as quick as a strong man bending or stretching out his arm; for mental states, as quick as a few drops of water drying up when they fall in a red-hot iron vessel. Whether the sensations arising are liked, disliked or both liked and disliked, it should be all the same to a person. In this way, they will be stopped and equanimity will be established.

This refers to those who are fully Awakened, Arahats. It is useful to know the goal to be reached, however, and to appreciate how much control over the mind is possible. For those who are still learners, the Buddha points out, sensations will cause them to be troubled and ashamed and the sensations will be loathed.

So we can see how important it is for laypeople to lead righteous and balanced lives, and how essential it is to develop control over the mind and the senses if this is to be done. We can all aspire to the perfect equanimity of the Arahats.

The Buddha in his discourse to the people of Sala and Veranja answers their question about what leads to good or bad results in future lives. We do not need to wait until then to reap the benefits of leading righteous, balanced lives. Venerable Buddhaghosa in the Visuddhimagga quotes several texts from the Suttas in which the Buddha describes present benefits. [10]

The first quotation is from the Buddha's answer to Venerable Ánanda’s question, "What is the object of, what profit is there, in good conduct?" [11] The Buddha answers that being free of remorse is the object of and profit in good conduct. In other words, if we live moral lives, we will have a clear conscience. Ánanda continued to question the Buddha and through his answers the Buddha showed that freedom from remorse leads to joy, which leads to rapture and so on -- through calm, happiness, concentration, seeing things as they really are, turning away, and fading of interest, one reaches the release through knowing and seeing. "So you see, Ánanda," the Buddha concluded, "good conduct leads gradually up to the highest."

Shortly before his death, the Buddha taught the laymen of Pataligama that there are five bad results for the immoral person and five good results for the moral person. If a person is immoral: (1) he is poor through indolence, (2) he has a bad reputation, (3) he is confused and lacks confidence whenever he goes to a meeting, (4) he has anxiety when he dies, and (5) he is reborn in the lower worlds of suffering, including the lowest of the hells.

On the other hand, if a person is moral: (1) he becomes wealthy through being industrious, (2) he has a good reputation, (3) he is confident and self-possessed whenever he goes to a meeting, (4) he dies without anxiety, and (5) he is reborn in a heavenly world.

Even if a person does not feel ready to try for the final goal of Awakening, Nibbána, these benefits of leading moral lives are well worth the effort. If a person has wealth, a good reputation, self-confidence, and no fear of death and what comes after, he will certainly be much happier than the average person in this world.

If development of the mind and of insight into the true reality of existence is added to moral living, the benefits can be far greater. This is pointed out in Ashin Buddhaghosa's last quotation, which is from a discourse given by the Buddha to a group of Bhikkhus. [12] Certain aspects of what the Buddha says apply particularly to Bhikkhus, but we can apply the basic ideas to the lives of laypeople.

First of all, the Buddha points out that the Bhikkhus should respect the moral code, seeing the danger there is in the slightest fault. With this strong basis, they will be able to be intent on internal mental tranquility with uninterrupted meditation, intent on attaining insight, and intent on seeking seclusion in order to work properly. Laypeople today can also work for mental calm through developing their concentration, even if they do not reach the highest stages of uninterrupted mindfulness that are possible for those who retire from everyday life or who make significant progress along the Path to Nibbána. They can acquire sufficient concentration to began developing insight. Even if laypeople of
today do not retire from everyday life permanently, it is possible to do so for certain periods during the day, for a day or more during the month, and for longer periods from time to time to undergo training in developing their concentration and insight through following a meditation course.

The range of benefits that can be expected, as the Buddha explains, go from relatively minor advantages all the way to the highest goal. First of all, a person will be dear to his companions in the life of purity, loved by them, and held in respect and honored by them. Bhikkhus will receive the four necessities of life, which correspond to the wealth to be expected for laypeople, which we mentioned already. If we wish that others who give to us should acquire great merit, then this will be the case, for we will be of great merit ourselves. The more highly developed a person is, the greater the merit there is in giving to him. When others make in giving to us they can share that merit. We will also be able to overcome aversion and craving, as well as fear and dread. The Buddha then enumerates the various stages of concentration, Awakening, and higher mental powers, which the Bhikkhus could strive to attain. All of these will not be appropriate for laypeople to aspire to, but the first three stages of Awakening are certainly within the grasp of all who have the necessary merits and who make the right kind of effort in this life.

Let us conclude with the Buddha's advice to Ánanda: [13] "Whatever, Ánanda, is to be done out of compassion by a teacher seeking the welfare of his disciples and compassionate for them, that has been done by me for you...Meditate, Ánanda, do not be slothful, do not be remorseful later. This is our instruction to you."

Christian conversion in Buddhist Sri Lanka by Kamalika Pieris

2008-04-14T23:10:00.000-07:00

The Rev. Sydney Knight has suggested that relations between the Buddhists and Christians is now very amicable and everything is fine between them. This could be contested. Let us look at one very important inter face between the two religions ? Christian conversion of Buddhists.

Patrick Johnstone stated that Sri Lanka is the only non-Muslim Asian country where the Church has steadily declined. It had dropped from 10% in the early 20th century to 7.4%. This drop was probably enhanced by the departure of the Burghers in the 1960s. There were 69.3% Buddhists, 15.4% Hindus, 7.6% Muslim and 7.4% Christians. Of this 7.4% Christians, 6.3% were Roman Catholic and just 0.7% were Protestant. Of the Protestant groups, the largest is the Church of Ceylon, followed by the Methodist church. ("operation World" 4 ed. 1986 p 386-387)

Christian conversion is not something new. The Christians have never stopped trying to convert. The departure of the British in 1948 did not stop them. The Kurunegala Diocese of the Church of Ceylon was founded in 1950 as a missionary diocese. It was carved out of the Diocese of Colombo to enable mission and evangelism. It established parishes in the Tea estates and areas of the Mahaweli Scheme. (Daily News. 5.2.2000 p 5, 6.2.2000 p 6)

Similarly the Catholic church also never gave up on conversion. This church has separate departments for the subject of conversion. Such as the ?Sacred Congregation for the Evangelisation of Peoples". Evangelisation means ?to convert?. There is also the Catholic objective of ?Consecration Mundi" or the conversion of the whole world. (Gunaseela Vitanage. Island. 9.6.99 p 15, 17.6.99 p 6, 14.7.99 p 18)

The Ecumenical Council of Vatican II (1962-1965) set the Catholic Church on a revised path towards conversion. There were regional synods. The Synod for the Bishops of Asia was held in Rome in 1998. The term ?Asia? included in this case, Middle East, Gulf States, South and Central Asia, South east Asia, Asian Siberia and the Far East. It was argued that Christianity was now a part of Asian culture. It was now Asian in outlook and sufficiently indigenised to become genuinely Asian. The policy drawn up by this Asian Synod was proclaimed by the Pope in November 1999 in New Delhi, India. It contained a specific call to the Catholics to convert Asians to Christianity. It stated that Europe went Christian in the first millennium. America and Africa went Christian in the second millennium. Now it was the turn of Asia. One newspaper summarised this as "Convert Asia next.. The Catholic Church also noted, inter alia, that Asia was a paradise for foreign investment. China was fast becoming a world super power with India trailing behind.

(Daily News. 9.11.99 p 10, Hindustan Times. 7.11.99 p5. Fr. Leopold Ratnasekera. Island. 22.3.98 p 12)

The Christians flatly state that conversion is a fundamental right. It is also a special right for them since conversion is ordered in the Bible. The Bible commanded a christian to go out and spread the ?good word? about Jesus Christ. This could be contested. The Holy Bible is not an internationally accepted document, binding on everybody in the world. It is highly regarded by the Christians and ignored by everybody else. Its contents have been criticised. India, it appears actually recognises the right to propagate ones faith, and has even recognised the special right of Christians to try and convert. But in the 1977 Bihar case the Supreme Court made a distinction. The constitutional right to propagate one?s faith did not include the right to convert another to it. There is legislation which prohibits conversion by force, fraud or allurement. Allurement implied a grant of any benefit, whether pecuniary or otherwise. This definition was so sweeping that anything from education and healthcare to food relief could be construed as ?inducement?. (Island. 8.11.99 p 8) In Orissa, the state government declared that persons who wanted to convert had to inform the district magistrate, who would have the matter examined by the police. The Christians protested. (Island. 2.2.2000 p 6) The Buddhists in Sri Lanka were also getting ready to seek legislation against unethical conversion. (Christianity Today 16.11.98 p 63) Harim Peries has stated that opposition to Christian conversion is a violation of the United Nations Human Rights declaration. (Daily News. 16.1.1999 p 8) Let us examine this assertion. Here are the relevant clauses.

(A) Article 18 of the International Covenant; on Civil and Political Rights (1976) states that:

1. "Everyone shall have the right; to freedom of thought, conscience and religion. This right shall include freedom to have or adopt a religion or belief of his choice....

2. "No one shall be subject to coercion which would impair his freedom to have or to adopt a religion or belief of his choice."

B. Article 19 of the same Covenant states that:

1. "Everyone shall have the right to hold opinions without interference.

2. "Everyone shall have the right to freedom of expression. This right shall include freedom to seek, receive and impart information of all kinds...."

3. Freedom to manifest one?s religion or belief may be subject only to such limitations as are prescribed by law and are necessary to protect public safety, order, health, morals and fundamental rights and freedoms of others.

C. Article 5 of the Declaration on the Elimination of all forms of Intolerance and Discrimination based on Religion (1981) states that:

"Every child shall enjoy the right to have access to education in the matter of religion or belief in accordance with wishes of his parents. And shall not be compelled to receive teaching on religion or belief against the wishes of his parents. The best interests of the child being the guiding principle. The parents have the right to organise life within the family in accordance with their religion.

A full reading of the United Nations "International Bill of Rights" clearly indicates that the clauses contained in item A above support the right of an individual to have a religion. Adopt a religion refers to a peson who has no religion to begin with. It is not about conversion. Conversion comes into the next section, item B does not support un-ethical conversion. It refers adversely to interference in ones beliefs. And it also recognises that the exercise of the unlimited right to impart information calls for controls. It carries with it ?special rights and responsibilities?. However, the UN refrains from spelling these out as regards religion. (Section 3 of Article 19) Section C is usually ignored when it comes to conversion. It is important. Because it expressly protects the child from indoctrination from outside the home. It supports the adoption of the parents religion until the child is of age. Christian conversion cannot find support in the UN human rights regulations. The question of ?proselytisation? has come up when these loosely and ill defined rights are discussed. The Buddhists should use the UN Bill of Rights when examining conversion away from Buddhism.

Christianity has an image problem in Asia. It is seen as foreign and alien. Its ugly history is never forgotten. In India, the Bajran Dal wanted the Pope to declare that all religions were equal, to announce that the Catholic Church would stay away from all conversions. They wanted an apology from the Pope for ?atrocities committed by the Church in India.? The Archbishop of Delhi rejected all this. (Daily News 16.10.99 p 10, 20.10.99 p 12). There was a fairly successful attempt in Sri Lanka to indigenise church rituals - using slokas, Kandyan drumming, gokkola decorations. Recently at St. Sebastians Church, Kandana there was a thorana ?done in Buddhist style?. (Sunday Leader 23.1.2000 p 3) Elsewhere it has been suggested that an attempt to metamorphose Christianity into a quasi Buddhist appearance by using orange robes and Buddhist ?ideas?. This, it is suggested is intended to blur the distinction between Chritianity and Buddhism, so that a person could be persuaded to move from one to the other without much trauma. There is now an attempt to present Christ as an Asian, on the ground that he was born in West Asia. The Pope stated in India that Jesus Christ, took flesh as an Asian. This is to make Christianity acceptable to the Asians. The emphasis on inter-religious dialogue is also a part of this transition. ?Dialogue is fast becoming the common mode of action for the Asian church. It was useful for transmitting the message. (Island. 22.3.98 p 22) In keeping with this, the Pope, in India spoke about the need for religious tolerance. About the Asian religions, pluralism, and Asian tolerance of other religions. The Vishwa Hindu Parishad was not impressed. It examined the Pope?s declaration closely. They found it contradictory. They pointed out that the Catholic Church did not recognise other religions or salvation outside Christianity. With this exclusivist approach how can the Pope talk about religious tolerance and pluralism? (Island. 5.ll.99 p 8) Lastly, one of the issues facing Christianity in the 21st century is its visual image. The statues of Jesus and Mary available in Europe are based on the statues designed between the 12th and 16 centuries. A modern image more relevant to contemporary Europe has been sought. In Sri Lanka there was some attempt to relate the images to the local scene, by using a drape which looked like the saree.

The main strategy in Christian conversion is to ?plant? a church in non-Christian areas. The target areas identified for Sri Lanka are the Villages, the colonisation schemes, the urban slums and the estate Tamils. Church authorities have pointed out that there are 25,483 villages in Sri Lanka and the number is increasing. There are about 480 evangelical groups meeting weekly all over the island. Only about 50 of these are in rural settings ?our aim must be to plant a church in each village?. Urban churches must choose a village and send in a worker to settle down in the village. Every village church must plant a new church in the adjacent village.

The larger urban churches were starting daughter churches in "unreached areas?? by which is meant a Buddhist area. ( "Operation World. p 388. Ajit Fernando. ?Christianity Today? 16.11.1998 p 62) Ajit Fernando is national director of Youth for Christ Programme. He was trained at Fuller Theological Seminary, USA and is a lay preacher in the Methodist Church of Sri Lanka.

The Buddhists have noted Christian conversion with concern and considerable anger. The Annual report of the YMBA, 1989-90 stated that the subtle proselytising campaign was still going on. Methods used were insidious. They involved giving money and other inducements to inveigle ?innocent and poverty stricken Buddhists into changing their religion. Funds were coming in from foreign lands to promote this anti-Buddhist activity. (p 49) Ajit Fernando stated that conversion had met with considerable opposition. Organisations had been set up in Sri Lanka to monitor Christian activities. About 21 churches had been burnt. Christian workers had been assaulted and chased away. Some converts had returned to Buddhism. (Christianity Today. 16.11.98 p 64). The various Buddhist organisations were slowly waking up to the need to be watchful. Seven Buddhist organisations opposed the Church of Ceylon Bill in 1998 on the grounds that it would enable the Church of Ceylon to spread in the ?Buddhist areas? and plant churches in the 25,000 villages in Sri Lanka. This could add to the unethical conversion of the poor into Christianity by evangelical Christian sects which were doing so freely. (Sunday Times. 10.5.98 p 11)

Gunaseela Vitanage drew attention to some of the decisions of Vatican II. The Decree on the Apostolate of the Laity issued by Vatican II directed the Catholic laity to infiltrate into all public and private institutions, such as government departments, the police and armed forces, also the mass media, with the intention of spreading the gospel and aiding conversion. Vitanage argues that this is a gross violation of the sovereignity of a country.

This is a general decree. It is unlikely that such simple Catholic Action could be carried out in 21 century Sri Lanka or indeed anywhere. (Island. 17.6.99 p 6)

Seneka Weeraratne wrote in, to strongly condemn the increasing infiltration of western Christian missionaries, through NGos supposedly working towards lifting economic standards of the poor, while in fact striving at every turn to convert Asian Buddhists to Christianity through offers of material inducements. (Island 26.12,99 p 18)

The Christian missionaries categorically deny that they are ?proselytising? or engaging in ?unethical conversion?. They say that they re-instructed by the Bible to try and convert. They are also instructed by the Bible to practice Christian charity. They do not combine the two. They do not link conversion to the charitable help they give. People convert by ?divine grace?. These ideas have been contested. Critics state that the Christian church alone did not have a monopoly over absolute truth and love. (Island. 17.7.99 p 9) Another said that he had never seen anyone convert through ?divine grace?.(?)

An important aspect of contemporary Christian conversion in Sri Lanka is the introduction of aggressive conversion by a series of predominantly American sects. This has caused concern in the established church too. Fr. Aloysius Peries stated that after the open economy started in the 1980s, there had been an ?easy intrusion of fundamentalist Christian groups with funding from the west, preaching a new version of the colonial Christ. ("Buddhism and Christianity." edited by Ulrich Everding. Goethe Institute, Colombo 1995. p 203)

These churches are popularly known as ?born again? sects.

There are also some 73 development NGOs, converting away in Sri Lanka. These churches first started arriving in the 1960s. They are funded and instructed by America and their main purpose is to convert. That is why they are known as ?evangelistic churches?. Lanka Perera says that they are ?spreading like wildfire? in country. (Sunday Leader. 21.2.99 p 30) The first to convert are the Christians themselves, Catholics and Protestants. This is felt to be accidental, I do not think so. For a missionary church to take root here, it is essential that the cooperation of the existing Christian community be obtained. In an attempt to stop young people from running to these more exciting and jollier sects, the established church is also now allowing a limited amount of guitar playing, yelling, jumping and clapping inside their churches. The conversion of young Christians to these new sects is actually a simple transfer of their loyalty from Rome to Washington. The belief in the Christian god remains the same. Some of these religious groups are trying to develop submissive cult groups, who either faint, or hand over their jewellery to the ?pastor? (see Lanka Perera) This will eventually affect the image of Christianity. I have observed some of these religious services. They are manipulative and encourage the development of hysteria. This is most inadvisable, both for the religion and for Sri Lanka.

S.R.N Hoole is another concerned Christian who has been critical of these sects. He has provided a lively description of the craft and manipulation employed by these sects. The target was Sri Lankan youth and carrot is America. The young people are attracted by America and other perks offered. Hoole therefore remarks that these religious sects were known as ?CIA cells". The leaders are trained and funded by America and sent here. They are given sales folders which gave precise instructions on how to conduct the meetings so as to catch new converts. They gave instructions on when to start the music, the singing, the clapping, and the praying. It is all programmed. (S.R.N Hoole. ?The exile returned. p 156-158) These religious leaders are paid well. So the leaders of these ?born again? sects, leave one sect and join another, because the foreign sponsors are ?waiting to grab them as their representatives in Sri Lanka.? (Christianity Today. p 64) Since America is funding, there is plenty of money available. People, are paid for bringing recruits. Some keep getting converted over and over again. These sects also have foreigners working in them in Sri Lanka. As a result the weddings of these converts are ?full of foreigners?. It could be argued that these new sects controlled by America are political in intent and not religious at all. There are sufficient established churches for routine evangelising.

The older churches are also now filled with preachers who have trained in the American seminaries. It is well known that after the end of the Cold War, America had targeted Asia as its next sphere of influence.

The Christian conversion handled by these sects is well planned. It would appear that the Church first surveyed the territory and then drew up a battle plan. Any edition of ?operation World? would confirm this. The strategy of the missionaries in Sri Lanka fall into two broad categories. Firstly the indoctrination of young persons and children, by presenting Christianity very subtly and in an attractive light. Secondly, by approaching adults when they were at their most vulnerable. Such as in sickness, physical handicap bereavement or financial difficulties.

It is this which infuriates the Buddhists. Otherwise they could not care less whether Buddhists remained Buddhists or not. The late Dr. C. de S. Wijesundera of Kandy has publicly criticised Christian conversion. He tried to alert us to the dangers. He pointed out that these religious sects were exploiting certain economic weaknesses, such as poverty. Their very methods of conversion courted hostility and suspicion. These sects were misusing freedom of speech, tax concessions, and the land granted by the government. They were engaged, he said in a "despicable, treacherous, indecent and massive assault on Buddhism". (references provided are dated: Island. 12.8.93 and Daily News. 5.10.91)

One strategy was to start pre-schools. Children were taught Christian hymns and elements of Christianity. This is hardly surprising. When we went to Christian schools in the pre independent period, we had to attend Christian prayers. A second method was to start English classes. The course work given in the English class had Christian content. Dr. C. de S. Wijesundera said that there were such schools in Mylapitiya and Bokkala in Kandy district. He branded them as active proselytising centres. In the 1990s such a venture had been started in Pannipitiya. The Buddhist priest of the area had intervened and the venture collapsed.

These American funded religious sects have also started hospitals. Dr. Wijesundera named three well known hospitals of this nature in Kandy and another one in Bokkawala. These hospitals were registered as charities but charged fees from patients. Prayer meetings were held in them. They also trained nurses. Permanent appointments were offered to nurses if they converted. Thereafter they were expected to convert patients. These are actually new variants of the old, colinial methods. What is new is the aggressive move into remote villages, where the urban Buddhists don?t find it easy to come in and chase them away, Buddhist Priests in these villages are appealing for help.

I have seen a letter sent by one such Buddhist priest. He named the agency, a well known religious group. They had set up an organisation, where the workers were paid. A childrens group was also set up. Adults were helped in various ways such as money, houses, jobs and other forms of financial support. These recruits were encouraged thereafter to become antagonistic to Buddhism. They became ?anti-temple?. Dayakayas were specially selected and weaned away from the Buddhist temple. Attendance at the Daham Pasala dropped. A hall put up for an agricultural project, looked just like a church. Lastly, this group had organised a Wesak kudu contest in front of the temple! Priest was helpless and appealed for help from the towns. It would therefore be apparent that the main reason Buddhists convert to Christianity is not because of the missionaries, but because of the lethargy, indifference and complacency of the Buddhists themselves.

(Island Newspaper)

Kassapa Sutta (Udana 1.6) : About Maha Kassapa

2008-04-14T22:00:00.000-07:00

I have heard that on one occasion the Blessed One was staying in Rajagaha at the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Sanctuary. Now at that time Ven. Maha Kassapa was staying at the Pipphali Cave, afflicted, in pain, and seriously ill. Then, at a later time, he recovered from his illness. When he had recovered from the illness, the thought occurred to him: "What if I were to go into Rajagaha for alms?"

Now at that time 500 devatas were eager for the chance to give alms to Ven. Maha Kassapa. But Ven. Maha Kassapa, turning down those 500 devatas, early in the morning put on his robes and, carrying his bowl and outer robe, went into Rajagaha for alms along the streets of the poor, the streets of the indigent, the streets of the weavers. The Blessed One saw that Ven. Maha Kassapa had gone into Rajagaha for alms along the streets of the poor, the streets of the indigent, the streets of the weavers.

Then, on realizing the significance of that, the Blessed One on that occasion exclaimed:

Maintaining no others,
unknown,
trained, established
in what is essential,
effluents1 ended,
anger disgorged:
He's what I call
a brahman.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kassapa Sutta (Udana 3.7) : About Maha Kassapa

I have heard that on one occasion the Blessed One was staying in Rajagaha at the Bamboo Grove, the Squirrels' Sanctuary. Now at that time Ven. Maha Kassapa was staying at the Pipphali Cave, sitting for seven days in a single position, having attained a certain level of concentration. Then, with the passage of seven days, he emerged from that concentration. On emerging from it, the thought occurred to him: "What if I were to go into Rajagaha for alms?"

Now at that time 500 devatas were eager for the chance to give alms to Ven. Maha Kassapa. But Ven. Maha Kassapa, turning down those 500 devatas, early in the morning put on his robes and, carrying his bowl and outer robe, went into Rajagaha for alms.

Now at that time Sakka, the king of the devas, wanted to give alms to Ven. Maha Kassapa. So, disguising himself as a weaver, he was working a loom, while Sujata, an asura-maiden, filled the shuttle. Then, as Ven. Maha Kassapa was going on an uninterrupted round for alms in Rajagaha, he arrived at Sakka's home. Sakka saw him coming from afar and, on seeing him, came out of house to meet him. Taking the bowl from his hand, he entered the house, took cooked rice from the pot, filled the bowl, and gave it back to Ven. Maha Kassapa. And that gift of alms included many kinds of curry, many kinds of sauces.

The thought occurred to Ven. Maha Kassapa, "Now, who is this being with such supranormal power & might?" Then the thought occurred to him, "This is Sakka, king of the devas, isn't it?" On realizing this, he said to Sakka, "Is this your doing, Kosiya?1 Don't ever do anything like this again."

"We, too, need merit, Ven. Kassapa. We, too, have use for merit."

Then, bowing down to Ven. Maha Kassapa and circumambulating him three times, Sakka rose up into the air and, while up in the sky, exclaimed three times:

"O the alms, the foremost alms, well-established in Kassapa!"
"O the alms, the foremost alms, well-established in Kassapa!"
"O the alms, the foremost alms, well-established in Kassapa!"

The Blessed One heard this with his divine hearing-property, surpassing that of the human. On realizing the significance of that, he on that occasion exclaimed:

The monk going for alms,
supporting himself and no other:
The devas adore one who is Such,
calmed & ever mindful.

Bhaddiya Kaligodha Sutta : About Bhaddiya Kaligodha

2008-04-14T21:53:00.000-07:00

I have heard that on one occasion the Blessed One was staying at Anupiya in the Mango Orchard. Now at that time, Ven. Bhaddiya Kaligodha, on going to a forest, to the foot of a tree, or to an empty dwelling, would repeatedly exclaim, "What bliss!

What bliss!" A large number of monks heard Ven. Bhaddiya Kaligodha, on going to a forest, to the foot of a tree, or to an empty dwelling, repeatedly exclaim, "What bliss! What bliss!" and on hearing him, the thought occurred to them, "There's no doubt but that Ven. Bhaddiya Kaligodha doesn't enjoy leading the holy life, for when he was a householder he knew the bliss of kingship, so that now, on recollecting that, he is repeatedly exclaiming, 'What bliss! What bliss!'" They went to the Blessed One and, on arrival, having bowed down to him, sat to one side.

As they were sitting there, they told him: "Ven. Bhaddiya Kaligodha, lord, on going to a forest, to the foot of a tree, or to an empty dwelling, repeatedly exclaims, 'What bliss! What bliss!' There's no doubt but that Ven. Bhaddiya Kaligodha doesn't enjoy leading the holy life, for when he was a householder he knew the bliss of kingship, so that now, on recollecting that, he is repeatedly exclaiming, 'What bliss! What bliss!'"

Then the Blessed One told a certain monk, "Come, monk. In my name, call Bhaddiya, saying, 'The Teacher calls you, my friend.'"

"As you say, lord," the monk answered and, having gone to Ven. Bhaddiya, on arrival he said, "The Teacher calls you, my friend."

"As you say, my friend," Ven. Bhaddiya replied. Then he went to the Blessed One and, on arrival, having bowed down to him, sat to one side. As he was sitting there, the Blessed One said to him, "Is it true, Bhaddiya that, on going to a forest, to the foot of a tree, or to an empty dwelling, you repeatedly exclaim, 'What bliss! What bliss!'?"

"Yes, lord."

"What meaning do you have in mind that you repeatedly exclaim, 'What bliss! What bliss!'?"

"Before, when I was a householder, maintaining the bliss of kingship, I had guards posted within and without the royal apartments, within and without the city, within and without the countryside. But even though I was thus guarded, thus protected, I dwelled in fear — agitated, distrustful, and afraid. But now, on going alone to a forest, to the foot of a tree, or to an empty dwelling, I dwell without fear, unagitated, confident, and unafraid — unconcerned, unruffled, my wants satisfied, with my mind like a wild deer. This is the meaning I have in mind that I repeatedly exclaim, 'What bliss! What bliss!'"

Then, on realizing the significance of that, the Blessed One on that occasion exclaimed:

In whom there exists
no provocation,
& for whom becoming & non-becoming
are overcome,
he is one — beyond fear,
blissful,
without grief,
whom the devas can't see.

Atthi Raga Sutta (Samyutta Nikaya XII.64) : Where There is Passion

2008-04-14T21:49:00.000-07:00

Dwelling at Savatthi..."There are these four nutriments for the establishing of beings who have taken birth or for the support of those in search of a place to be born. Which four? Physical food, gross or refined; contact as the second, consciousness the third, and intellectual intention the fourth. These are the four nutriments for the establishing of beings or for the support of those in search of a place to be born.

"Where there is passion, delight, & craving for the nutriment of physical food, consciousness lands there and grows. Where consciousness lands and grows, name-&-form alights. Where name-&-form alights, there is the growth of fabrications. Where there is the growth of fabrications, there is the production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is the production of renewed becoming in the future, there is future birth, aging, & death, together, I tell you, with sorrow, affliction, & despair.

"Where there is passion, delight, & craving for the nutriment of contact...

"Where there is passion, delight, & craving for the nutriment of consciousness...

"Where there is passion, delight, & craving for the nutriment of intellectual intention, consciousness lands there and grows. Where consciousness lands and grows, name-&-form alights. Where name-&-form alights, there is the growth of fabrications. Where there is the growth of fabrications, there is the production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is the production of renewed becoming in the future, there is future birth, aging, & death, together, I tell you, with sorrow, affliction, & despair.

"Just as -- when there is dye, lac, yellow orpiment, indigo, or crimson -- a dyer or painter would paint the picture of a woman or a man, complete in all its parts, on a well-polished panel or wall, or on a piece of cloth; in the same way, where there is passion, delight, & craving for the nutriment of physical food...contact...consciousness...intellectual intention, consciousness lands there and grows. Where consciousness lands and grows, name-&-form alights. Where name-&-form alights, there is the growth of fabrications. Where there is the growth of fabrications, there is the production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is the production of renewed becoming in the future, there is future birth, aging, & death, together, I tell you, with sorrow, affliction, & despair.

"Where there is no passion for the nutriment of physical food, where there is no delight, no craving, then consciousness does not land there or grow. Where consciousness does not land or grow, name-&-form does not alight. Where name-&-form does not alight, there is no growth of fabrications. Where there is no growth of fabrications, there is no production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is no production of renewed becoming in the future, there is no future birth, aging, & death. That, I tell you, has no sorrow, affliction, or despair.

"Where there is no passion for the nutriment of contact...

"Where there is no passion for the nutriment of consciousness...

"Where there is no passion for the nutriment of intellectual intention, where there is no delight, no craving, then consciousness does not land there or grow. Where consciousness does not land or grow, name-&-form does not alight. Where name-&-form does not alight, there is no growth of fabrications. Where there is no growth of fabrications, there is no production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is no production of renewed becoming in the future, there is no future birth, aging, & death. That, I tell you, has no sorrow, affliction, or despair.

"Just as if there were a roofed house or a roofed hall having windows on the north, the south, or the east. When the sun rises, and a ray has entered by way of the window, where does it land?"

"On the western wall, lord."

"And if there is no western wall, where does it land?"

"On the ground, lord."

"And if there is no ground, where does it land?"

"On the water, lord."

"And if there is no water, where does it land?"

"It does not land, lord."

"In the same way, where there is no passion for the nutriment of physical food...contact...consciousness...intellectual intention, where there is no delight, no craving, then consciousness does not land there or grow. Where consciousness does not land or grow, name-&-form does not alight. Where name-&-form does not alight, there is no growth of fabrications. Where there is no growth of fabrications, there is no production of renewed becoming in the future. Where there is no production of renewed becoming in the future, there is no future birth, aging, & death. That, I tell you, has no sorrow, affliction, or despair."

(Access To Insight)

Dantabhumi Sutta (Majjhima Nikaya 125) - The Discourse on the 'Tamed Stage'

2008-04-09T23:19:00.000-07:00

Thus have I heard: At one time the Lord was staying near Rajagaha in the Bamboo Grove at the squirrels' feeding place. Now at that time the novice Aciravata was staying in the Forest Hut.1 Then prince Jayasena,2 who was always pacing up and down, always roaming about on foot, approached the novice Aciravata; having approached he exchanged greetings with the novice Aciravata; having exchanged greetings of friendliness and courtesy, he sat down at a respectful distance. While he was sitting down at a respectful distance, Prince Jayasena spoke thus to the novice Aciravata:

"I have heard, good Aggivessana, that if a monk is abiding here diligent, ardent, self-resolute, he may attain one-pointedness of mind."

"That is so, prince; that is so, prince. A monk abiding here diligent, ardent, self-resolute, may attain one-pointedness of mind."

"It were good if the reverend Aggivessana were to teach me dhamma as he has heard it, as he has mastered it."

"I, prince, am not able to teach you dhamma as I have heard it, as I have mastered it. Now, if I were to teach you dhamma as I have heard it, as I have mastered it, and if you could not understand the meaning of what I said, that would be weariness to me, that would be a vexation to me."

"Let the reverend Aggivessana teach me dhamma as he has heard it, as he has mastered it. Perhaps I could understand the meaning of what the good Aggivessana says."

"If I were to teach you dhamma, prince, as I have heard it, as I have mastered it, and if you were to understand the meaning of what I say, that would be good; if you should not understand the meaning of what I say, you must remain as you are: you must not question me further on the matter."

"Let the reverend Aggivessana teach me dhamma as he has heard it, as he has mastered it. If I understand the meaning of what the good Aggivessana says, that will be good; if I do not understand the meaning of what the good Aggivessana says, I will remain as I am; I will not question the reverend Aggivessana further on this matter."

Then the novice Aciravata taught dhamma to Prince Jayasena as he had heard it, as he had mastered it. When this had been said, Prince Jayasena spoke thus to the novice Aciravata:

"This is impossible, good Aggivessana, it cannot come to pass that a monk abiding diligent, ardent, self-resolute, should attain one-pointedness of mind." Then Prince Jayasena, having declared to the novice Aciravata that this was impossible and could not come to pass, rising from his seat, departed.

And soon after Prince Jayasena had departed, the novice Aciravata approached the Lord; having approached and greeted the Lord, he sat down at a respectful distance. As he was sitting down at a respectful distance, the novice Aciravata told the Lord the whole of the conversation he had with Prince Jayasena as far as it had gone. When this had been said, the Lord spoke thus to the novice Aciravata:

"What is the good of that, Aggivessana? That Prince Jayasena, living as he does in the midst of sense-pleasures, enjoying sense-pleasures, being consumed by thoughts of sense-pleasures, burning with the fever of sense-pleasures, eager in the search for sense-pleasures, should know or see or attain or realize that which can be known by renunciation, seen by renunciation, attained by renunciation, realized by renunciation — such a situation does not exist. It is as if, Aggivessana, among elephants or horses or oxen to be tamed, two elephants, two horses or two oxen are well tamed, well trained, and two are not tamed, not trained. What do you think about this, Aggivessana? Would these two elephants or horses or oxen that were to be tamed and that were well tamed, well trained — would these on being tamed reach tamed capacity, would they, being tamed, attain a tamed stage?"

"Yes, revered sir."

"But those two elephants or horses or oxen that were to be tamed but that were neither tamed nor trained — would these, not being tamed, attain a tamed stage as do the two elephants or horses or oxen to be tamed that were well tamed, well trained?"

"No, revered sir."

"Even so, Aggivessana, that Prince Jayasena, living as he does in the midst of sense-pleasures... should know or see or attain or realize that which can be known and realized by renunciation — such a situation does not exist. It is as if, Aggivessana, there were a great mountain slope near a village or a market-town which two friends, coming hand in hand from that village or market-town might approach; having approached the mountain slope one friend might remain at the foot while the other might climb to the top. Then the friend standing at the foot of the mountain slope might speak thus to the one standing on the top: 'My dear, what do you see as you stand on the top of the mountain slope?' He might reply: 'As I stand on the top of the mountain slope I, my dear, see delightful parks, delightful woods, delightful stretches of level ground delightful ponds.' But the other might speak thus: 'This is impossible, it cannot come to pass, my dear, that, as you stand on the top of the mountain slope, you should see... delightful ponds.' Then the friend who had been standing on top of the mountain slope having come down to the foot and taken his friend by the arm, making him climb to the top of the mountain slope and giving him a moment in which to regain his breath, might speak to him thus: 'Now, my dear, what is it that you see as you stand on the top of the mountain slope?' He might speak thus: 'I, my dear, as I stand on the top of the mountain slope, see delightful parks... delightful ponds.' He might speak thus: 'Just now, my dear, we understood you to say: This is impossible, it cannot come to pass that, as you stand on the top of the mountain slope, you should see delightful... ponds. But now we understand you to say: 'I, my dear, as I stand on the top of the mountain slope, see delightful parks... delightful ponds.' He might speak thus: 'That was because I, my dear, hemmed in by this great mountain slope, could not see what was to be seen.'

"Even so but to a still greater degree, Aggivessana, is Prince Jayasena hemmed in, blocked, obstructed, enveloped by this mass of ignorance. Indeed, that Prince Jayasena, living as he does in the midst of sense-pleasures, enjoying sense-pleasures, being consumed by thoughts of sense-pleasures, eager in the search for sense-pleasures, should know or see or attain or realize that which can be known... seen... attained... realized by renunciation — such a situation does not exist. Had these two similes occurred to you, Aggivessana, for Prince Jayasena, Prince Jayasena naturally would have acted in the manner of one having trust in you."

"But how could these two similes for Prince Jayasena have occurred to me, revered sir, seeing that they are spontaneous, that is to say to the Lord, and have never been heard before?"

"As, Aggivessana, a noble anointed king addresses an elephant hunter saying; 'You, good elephant hunter, mount the king's elephant and go into an elephant forest. When you see a forest elephant, tie him to the neck of the king's elephant.' And, Aggivessana, the elephant hunter having answered: 'Yes, sire,' in assent to the noble anointed king, mounts the king's elephant and goes into an elephant forest. Seeing a forest elephant, he ties him to the neck of the king's elephant. So the king's elephant brings him out into the open. But, Aggivessana, the forest elephant has this longing, that is to say for the elephant forest. But in regard to him the elephant hunter tells the noble anointed king that the forest elephant has got out into the open. The noble anointed king then addresses an elephant tamer, saying: 'Come you, good elephant tamer, tame the forest elephant by subduing his forest ways, by subduing his forest memories, and aspirations and by subduing his distress, his fretting and fever for the forest, by making him pleased with the villages and by accustoming him to human ways.'

"And, Aggivessana, the elephant tamer, having answered 'Yes, sire,' in assent to the noble anointed king, driving a great post into the ground ties the forest elephant to it by his neck so as to subdue his forest ways... and accustom him to human ways. Then the elephant tamer addresses him with such words as are gentle, pleasing to the ear, affectionate, going to the heart, urbane, pleasant to the manyfolk, liked by the manyfolk. And, Aggivessana, the forest elephant, on being addressed with words that are gentle... liked by the manyfolk, listens, lends ear and bends his mind to learning. Next the elephant tamer supplies him with grass-fodder and water. When, Aggivessana, the forest elephant has accepted the grass-fodder and water from the elephant tamer, it occurs to the elephant tamer: 'The king's elephant will now live.' Then the elephant tamer makes him do a further task, saying: 'Take up, put down.' When, Aggivessana the king's elephant is obedient to the elephant tamer and acts on his instructions to take up and put down, then the elephant tamer makes him do a further task, saying: 'Get up, sit down.' When, Aggivessana, the king's elephant is obedient to the elephant tamer and acts on his instructions to get up and sit down, then the elephant tamer makes him do a further task; known as 'standing your ground': he ties a shield to the great beast's trunk; a man holding a lance is sitting on his neck, and men holding lances are standing surrounding him on all sides; and the elephant tamer, holding a lance with a long shaft, is standing in front. While he is doing the task of 'standing your ground' he does not move a fore-leg nor does he move a hind-leg, nor does he move the forepart of his body, nor does he move the hindpart of his body, nor does he move his head, nor does he move an ear, nor does he move a tusk, nor does he move his tail, nor does he move his trunk. A king's elephant is one who endures blows of sword, axe, arrow, hatchet, and the resounding din of drum and kettle-drum, conch and tam-tam, he is [like] purified gold purged of all its dross and impurities, fit for a king, a royal possession and reckoned as a kingly attribute.

Acquisition of faith
"Even so, Aggivessana, does a Tathagata arise here in the world, a perfected one, fully Self-Awakened One, endowed with right knowledge and conduct, well-farer, knower of the worlds, the matchless charioteer of men to be tamed, the Awakened One, the Lord. He makes known this world with the devas, with Mara, with Brahma, the creation with its recluses and brahmans, its devas and men, having realized them by his own super-knowledge. He teaches dhamma which is lovely at the beginning, lovely in the middle, lovely at the ending, with the spirit and the letters; he proclaims the Brahma-faring,3 wholly fulfilled, quite purified. A householder or a householder's son or one born in another family hears that dhamma. Having heard that dhamma he gains faith in the Tathagata. Endowed with this faith that he has acquired, he reflects in this way: 'The household life is confined and dusty, going forth is in the open; it is not easy for one who lives in a house to fare the Brahma-faring wholly fulfilled, wholly pure, polished like a conch-shell. Suppose now that I, having cut off hair and beard, having put on saffron robes, should go forth from home into homelessness?' After a time, getting rid of his wealth, be it small or great, getting rid of his circle of relations, be it small or great, having cut off his hair and beard, having put on saffron robes, he goes forth from home into homelessness. To this extent, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple gets out into the open.

Morality
"But, Aggivessana, devas and mankind have this longing, that is to say, for the five strands of sense-pleasures. The Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, be moral, live controlled by the control of the Obligations, possessed of [right] behavior and posture, seeing danger in the slightest faults; undertaking them, train yourself in the rules of training.'

Sense-Control
"And when, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple is moral, lives controlled by the control..., undertaking them, trains himself in the rules of training, then the Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, be guarded as to the doors of the sense-organs. Having seen a material shape with the eye...(as above). Having cognized a mental state with the mind, be not entranced by the general appearance, be not entranced by the detail. For if you dwell with the organ of mind uncontrolled, covetousness and dejection, evil unskillful states of mind, might flow in. So fare along with its control, guard the organ of mind, achieve control over the organ of the mind.'

Moderation in eating
"And when, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple is guarded as to the doors of the sense-organs, then the Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, be moderate in eating...(as above)... abiding in comfort.'

Vigilance
"When, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple is moderate in eating, the Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, abide intent on vigilance...(as above)... you should cleanse the mind of obstructive mental states.

Mindfulness and clear consciousness
"And when, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple is intent on vigilance, then the Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, be possessed of mindfulness and clear consciousness. Be one who acts with clear consciousness...(as above)... talking, silent.'

Overcoming of the five hindrances
"And when, Aggivessana, the ariyan disciple is possessed of mindfulness and clear consciousness, then the Tathagata disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, choose a remote lodging in a forest, at the root of a tree, on a mountain slope, in a wilderness, in a hill-cave, a cemetery, a forest haunt, in the open or on a heap of straw.' He chooses a remote lodging in the forest... or on a heap of straw. Returning from alms-gathering, after the meal, he sits down cross-legged, holding the back erect, having made mindfulness rise up in front of him, he, by getting rid of coveting for the world, dwells with a mind devoid of coveting, he purifies the mind of coveting. By getting rid of the taint of ill-will, he dwells benevolent in mind, compassionate for the welfare of all creatures and beings, he purifies the mind of the taint of ill-will. By getting rid of sloth and torpor, he dwells devoid of sloth and torpor; perceiving the light, mindful, clearly conscious, he purifies the mind of sloth and torpor. By getting rid of restlessness and worry, he dwells calmly the mind subjectively tranquilized, he purifies the mind of restlessness and worry. By getting rid of doubt, he dwells doubt-crossed, unperplexed as to the states that are skillful, he purifies the mind of doubt.

The four applications of mindfulness
"He, by getting rid of these five hindrances which are defilements of the mind and weakening to intuitive wisdom, dwells contemplating the body in the body, ardent, clearly conscious [of it], mindful [of it] so as to control the covetousness and dejection in the world. He fares along contemplating the feelings... the mind... the mental states in mental states, ardent, clearly conscious [of them], mindful [of them] so as to control the covetousness and dejection in the world.

"As, Aggivessana, an elephant tamer, driving a great post into the ground, ties a forest elephant to it by his neck so as to subdue his forest ways, so as to subdue his forest aspirations, and so as to subdue his distress, his fretting and fever for the forest, so as to make him pleased with villages and accustom him to human ways — even so, Aggivessana, these four applications of mindfulness are ties of the mind so as to subdue the ways of householders and to subdue the aspirations of householders and to subdue the distress, the fretting and fever of householders; they are for leading to the right path, for realizing nibbana.

"The Tathagata then disciplines him further, saying: 'Come you, monk, fare along contemplating the body in the body, but do not apply yourself to a train of thought connected with the body; fare along contemplating the feelings in the feelings... the mind in the mind... mental states in mental states, but do not apply yourself to a train of thought connected with mental states.'

Jhana
"He by allaying initial thought and discursive thought, with the mind subjectively tranquilized and fixed on one point, enters on and abides in the second meditation4 which is devoid of initial and discursive thought, is born of concentration and is rapturous and joyful. By the fading out of rapture, he dwells with equanimity, attentive and clearly conscious, and experiences in his person that joy of which the ariyans say: 'Joyful lives he who has equanimity and is mindful,' and he enters and abides in the third meditation. By getting rid of joy, by getting rid of anguish, by the going down of his former pleasures and sorrows, he enters and abides in the fourth meditation which has neither anguish nor joy, and which is entirely purified by equanimity and mindfulness.

(The three knowledges, te-vijja)
(1. Recollection of former habitations)
"Then with the mind composed thus, quite purified, quite clarified, without blemish, without defilement, grown pliant and workable, fixed, immovable, he directs his mind to the knowledge and recollection of former habitation: he remembers a variety of former habitations, thus: one birth, two births, three... four... five... ten... twenty... thirty... forty... fifty... a hundred... a thousand... a hundred thousand births, and many an eon of integration and many an eon of disintegration and many an eon of integration-disintegration: 'Such a one was I by name, having such a clan, such and such a color, so was I nourished, such and such pleasant and painful experiences were mine, so did the span of life end. Passing from this, I came to be in another state where such a one was I by name, having such and such a clan, such and such a color, so was I nourished, such and such pleasant and painful experiences were mine, so did the span of life end. Passing from this, I arose here.' Thus he remembers divers former habitations in all their modes and details.

(2. The Divine Eye)
"Then with the mind composed, quite purified, quite clarified, without blemish, without defilement, grown pliant and workable, fixed, immovable, he directs his mind to the knowledge of the passing hence and the arising of beings. With the purified deva-vision surpassing that of men, he sees beings as they pass hence or come to be; he comprehends that beings are mean, excellent, comely, ugly, well-going, ill-going, according to the consequence of their deeds, the he thinks: Indeed these worthy beings who were possessed of wrong conduct in body, who were possessed of wrong conduct in speech, who were possessed of wrong conduct of thought, scoffers at the ariyans, holding a wrong view, incurring deeds consequent on a wrong view — these, at the breaking up of the body after dying, have arisen in a sorrowful state, a bad bourn, the abyss, Niraya hell. But these worthy beings who were possessed of good conduct in body, who were possessed of good conduct in speech, who were possessed of good conduct in thought, who did not scoff at the ariyans, holding a right view, incurring deeds consequent on a right view — these, at the breaking up of the body, after dying, have arisen in a good bourn, a heaven world.

(3. Destruction of Cankers: Sainthood)
"Then with the mind composed... immovable, he directs his mind to the knowledge of the destruction of the cankers.5 He understands as it really is: This is anguish,6 this is the arising of anguish, this is the stopping of anguish, this is the course leading to the stopping of anguish. He understands as it really is: These are the cankers, this is the arising of the cankers, this is the stopping of the cankers, this is the course leading to the stopping of the cankers. Knowing thus, seeing thus, his mind is freed from the canker of sense pleasures, is freed from the canker of becoming, freed from the canker of ignorance. In freedom the knowledge came to be: I am freed; and he comprehends: Destroyed is birth, brought to a close is the Brahma-faring, done is what was to be done, there is no more of being such or such.

"That monk is able to endure, head, cold, hunger, thirst, the touch of mosquitoes, gadflies, wind, sun and creeping things, abusive language and unwelcome modes of speech: he has grown to bear bodily feelings which as they arise are painful, acute, sharp, severe, wretched, miserable, deadly. Purged of all the dross and impurities of attachment, aversion and confusion,7 he is worthy of oblations, offerings, respect and homage, an unsurpassed field of merit in the world.

"If, Aggivessana, a king's elephant dies in old age, untamed, untrained, the king's old elephant that has died is reckoned as one that has died untamed: And so, Aggivessana, of a king's elephant that is middle-aged. And too, Aggivessana, if a king's elephant dies young, untamed, untrained, the king's young elephant that has died is reckoned as one that has died untamed. Even so, Aggivessana, if a monk who is an elder dies with the cankers not destroyed, the monk who is an elder that has died is reckoned as one that has died untamed. And so of a monk of middle standing. And too, Aggivessana, if a newly ordained monk dies with the cankers not destroyed, the newly ordained monk that has died is reckoned as one that has died untamed. If, Aggivessana, a king's elephant dies in old age, well tamed, well trained, the king's old elephant that has died is reckoned as one that has died tamed. And so, Aggivessana of a king's elephant that is middle-aged. And too, Aggivessana, if a king's elephant dies young, well tamed, well trained, the king's young elephant that has died is reckoned as one that has died tamed. Even so, Aggivessana, if a monk who is an elder dies with the cankers destroyed, the monk who is an elder that has died is reckoned as one that has died tamed. And so, Aggivessana, of a monk of middle standing. And too, Aggivessana, if a newly ordained monk dies with cankers destroyed, the newly ordained monk that has died is reckoned as one that has died tamed."

Thus spoke the Lord. Delighted, the novice Aciravata rejoiced in what the Lord had said.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Notes

1. A hut in a secluded part of the Bamboo Grove for the use of monks who wanted to practice striving, padhana — [Commentary].

2. A son of King Bimbisara.

3. Brahmacariyam: the pure life of a celibate recluse [Ed., The Wheel].

4. It is noteworthy that the section on the Four Applications of Mindfulness (satipatthana) is here followed by the second meditation (jhana) without mention of the first. This may either refer to a meditator who, already previously, has attained to the first jhana, or, which seems more probable, it is meant to indicate that the intensive practice of Satipatthana which, through emphasis on bare observation, tends to reduce discursive thought, and enables the meditator to enter directly into the second jhana, which is free from initial and discursive thought (vitakka-vicara). This latter explanation is favored by the facts that (1) in our text, the practice of Satipatthana is preceded by the temporary abandonment of the five Hindrances, which indicates a high degree of concentration approaching that of the jhana; (2) in our text, the meditator is advised not to engage in the thought about the body, feelings, etc. — that is, in discursive thinking, which is still present in the first jhana. [Ed., The Wheel].

5. Asava.

6. Dukkha: usually rendered by "suffering" or "ill" [Ed., The Wheel].

7. Raga, dosa, moha.

An American monk in Charleston

2008-04-04T04:08:00.000-07:00

Over the telephone, Buddhist monk Bhante Yogavacara Rahula sounds a little like a stranger in a strange land. There's a faint accent that suggests he learned English later in life and, of course, there's his name.

Bhante means "venerable sir," and is the polite way to address a Theravedan Buddhist monk. Rahula is a common name in India and Nepal and refers to the historical Buddha's only son. He is not, however, a stranger in a strange land.

Bhante Rahula was born Scott Joseph Duprez in 1948. He grew up in California, attending a Methodist church with his parents. His first Buddha statue decorated the top of an old television set. He used to hang a hat on it.

He went to junior college, smoked marijuana, then joined the military. After his tour in Vietnam, he wore his hair long, grew a beard, chased girls and did just about any drug he could get his hands on.

"Sex, drugs and rock 'n' roll," said the monk, who visits Charleston today through Sunday to give several public presentations.

Bhante Rahula's story of how he went from typical hippie to clear-headed Buddhist monk is chronicled in his book, "One Night's Shelter: Autobiography of an American Monk." Two versions of the book exist. There's the "green" version, which catalogs his extensive drug use and sexual escapades. It details his time as a drug dealer, mentions his time in the Army stockade for being AWOL, as well as his arrest and detainment in an Afghan prison after trying to smuggle drugs into India.

"That's the toned-down version," said the 59 year-old monk, laughing. "The other version is much juicier. More sex, more drugs, more rock 'n' roll."

Bhante Rahula doesn't celebrate who he was in the 1960s, but he's not afraid of it. He's at peace with it. If not for the constant craving for chemically induced experiences, he might not have found his way to the dharma, the teachings of the Buddha. Wishing now to have been different then is pointless.

"It's all just grist for the mill," he said. "Taking all of those drugs. I didn't know any alternative."

He acknowledges that he got off pretty easy. He made it out alive.

Becoming a Buddhist, then a monk started with his craving. He was always on the lookout for the next high, the next profound experience. While he was traveling in the mountains of Asia, he heard about a meditation course in Katmandu. He went looking for another experience, but stayed for the enlightenment.

"That was the turnaround for me," he said. "I had this very deep insight, and I just wanted to pursue meditation and the dharma."

It didn't happen overnight, but in 1975, he was ordained as a monk in Sri Lanka. He lived in caves and huts, avoiding wild animals and poisonous snakes. He meditated to train his mind to shed fears and to focus his attention.

In 1985, Bhante Rahula heard about another monk's plans to build a Therevadan Buddhist monastery in the hills of West Virginia. He saw it as an opportunity to come back to the United States and bring some of what he'd learned.

He wrote to the monk, an internationally known meditation teacher named Bhante Gunaratana, who told him he should come. Rahula began to help build the monastery in 1987 on a plot of land in the Hampshire County backwoods.

Life at the Bhavana Society Forest Monastery near Wardensville is not entirely different from the simple life he lived in Sri Lanka. He continues to live in a small hut - called a 'kuti' - without electricity or running water (the main hall does have both).

He meditates, studies the Buddhist Sutras and books related to Buddhist thought and helps lead meditation retreats to people who come from around the world to Bhavana.

"We study and read some of the contemporary readings," Bhante Rahula said. "How science is relating to dharma teachings and Buddhism. We could read other things, I suppose, but I do not. We don't want to fill our minds with anything not on the dharma."

Occasionally, he does read a little about hiking in the Himalayas. He's been to Mount Everest several times with friends and gotten as far as the Everest base camp. "I do it mainly for the exercise, but also to push the envelope of discomfort."

He hikes some in the United States and usually takes a camping trip to Dolly Sods about once a year.

Bhante Rahula isn't the only American-born Buddhist monk. He wasn't even the first. Although he stops short of calling the vocation rare in this country, he agrees there aren't many.

"There are perhaps several hundred," he said. "Some stay with it, as I have. Others dabble with it for a few years."

Living in the United States again, Bhante Rahula is better able to keep in contact with his family and a few old friends. He visits his mother in California, where he also sees his brother and sister. His sister is a fundamentalist Christian, he says, and visits with her used to be tense.

"She's mellowed out, and I think she accepts what I am and what I do."

Living at the monastery affords him more opportunities to travel. Groups from different parts of the country and around the world sometimes invite him to visit with them and lead retreats.

The Meditation Circle of Charleston has been host for Bhante Rahula's visits in Charleston a few times, including a visit this weekend at the Unitarian Universalist Fellowship Building. The visit will include talks about meditation, Buddhism and a slideshow of his spiritual trekking in the Himalayans.

He believes meditation is helpful for anyone, regardless of their particular spiritual path. Meditation helps people draw on resources they aren't even aware they have.

"It's a way to develop the mind," he said. "It can help you develop acceptance, patience, loving kindness toward others and deal with life on a more even keel."

Retreating amidst the Blue Mountains

2008-02-24T20:08:00.000-08:00

Buddhism has been accepted as the fastest growing religion in Australia with more and more Australians showing an increasing interest, particularly in meditation. Forest monasteries have been established in the major cities for both the clergy and the laity to practise meditation in a peaceful atmosphere.

The lay people partaking of the dana

Going on Pindapatha: Ven. Kovida (at right) with another monk

Not often does a Buddhist monk gets invited to a wedding. It is a rare happening. When Venerable Kovida of the Katoomba forest hermitage in Sydney received an invitation to a wedding, he was a little puzzled. “What am I expected to do,” he wondered. “We want you to come and chant ‘pirith’ and bless the couple,” he was told.

An Australian couple who had embraced Buddhism was getting married. They were keen to get blessed the “Buddhist way”. The Thera obliged and joined the guests at the garden wedding. He distributed the printed text and they all accompanied the monk in the chanting.

Kovida Thera, who moved over from his temple in Kirulapone a few years back, is the resident monk at the Katoomba Aranyaya – the oldest Buddhist vihara in Australia situated in the cool climes of the Blue Mountains, one of the country’s most popular tourist centres around 100 km west of Sydney. Tourists throng to Echo Point to see the famous rock formation, the Three Sisters. According to Aboriginal legend, the Three Sisters was created when three sisters who had broken marriage laws by meeting three young men from another tribe were turned into stone by the tribal witch doctor!

Set amidst a quiet forest area, the temple basically serves as a meditation centre. “There are devotees who have been regularly coming over for the past 25 to 30 years. More and more Australians are getting interested in Buddhism and the numbers embracing Buddhism increase by the year,” Kovida Thera who hails from Kudagala near Elpitiya, says.

A 20-day meditation retreat was in progress when we visited the temple with the ‘dana’ on a Wednesday. Strict silence is observed in order not to disturb the meditators who occupy the meditation hall a little away from the alms hall. The participants are advised to refrain from talking to one another and they maintain silence (referred to as ‘noble silence’) except at Dhamma discussions. The monk guides them in their meditation and one to one discussions are held when specific issues are resolved. Experienced lay teachers too conduct classes.

There is one long (20-day) retreat during the year – in January to coincide with Duruthu full moon. Three seven-day retreats are also held – the autumn retreat in April, winter retreat in July and spring retreat in October. “The response to these is most encouraging. Devotees reserve their places months ahead, the monk says. No fee is charged. Meals are also provided free. With the participants observing ‘ata sil’, their meals are confined to the morning and afternoon ‘dana’. Sri Lankan and Australian ‘dayakas’ bring the ‘dana’ regularly according to a roster prepared at the beginning of the year. In fact, there is a waiting list to get a place.

The batch of 14 participants – 12 Australians and two Sri Lankans – was a mix of young and old, male and female. At ‘dana’ time, they walked in to the alms hall following the monks. We served them just as we did the monks and one of them offered us merit at the end of the ‘dana’.

Kovida Thera has planned a full programme of activities for the year. In addition to the daily one hour services – one in the morning and the other in the evening – a three- hour meditation class is held every Sunday morning with two-day meditation retreats every full moon Poya. He also conducts special programmes for school and university students.The annual Katina pinkama is an event eagerly looked forward to by the Sri Lankan community. Usually a few families get together in planning the ‘pinkama’. Monks are invited from nearby Sri Lankan and Thai temples. The task of conducting the main ceremony of accepting the Katina robe is done by a senior monk. Venerable Dhammagaveshi Thera from Lankaramaya performed this function at last year’s ceremony.

“While ours is essentially a meditation centre, we don’t ignore the requests, particularly by the Sri Lankan Buddhists, to assist them in attending to religious activities they have been used to back at home,” Kovida Thera stresses.

Noble Dukkha: How On Earth Suffering Is Noble?

2007-12-25T02:50:00.000-08:00

This word was used by the Buddha in order to explain the nature of human kind. Although this word is simply translated by “suffering”, it does not express the philosophical meaning of the word dukkha. It is the human nature of Unsatisfactoriness. Man keeps desires in front of him and runs after them. He will never get satisfaction. Like the horse who gallops after the carrot fixed three inches ahead of him on the horse cart. (This metaphor is used to explain the nature of human beings by French Existentialists) By understanding that we suffer from a lack of satisfaction in life and that every thing in the world is impermanent and cannot bring lasting happiness the person can come to understand the true nature of the world. It is enlightenment. It is Wisdom.

“The Buddha teaches us that the actions people deliberately intend to do would have consequences for their future life. It is called Karma. There are two types of actions: Skilful Actions or positive Karma and Unskilful actions or Negative Karma. A Buddhist should treat all people and all living things with compassion so that they do not do anything to contribute to negative Karma in themselves.”

The Buddha teaches us that the actions people deliberately intend to do would have consequences for their future life. It is called Karma. There are two types of actions: Skilful Actions or positive Karma and Unskilful actions or Negative Karma. A Buddhist should treat all people and all living things with compassion so that they do not do anything to contribute to negative Karma in themselves. While in meditation one can come to a point where he or she understands that there is no separation between him or her and the rest of the world. He or she thus understands non-duality through which automatically arises compassion.

Buddha chooses words very carefully. He says that the DUKKHA is NOBLE! How on earth can Dukkha become noble? Sans Dukkha the world would be tasteless & dull! It would have been like a stone slab! It is Dukkha that guides us! For this reason Dukkha becomes Noble! Long live Noble Dukkha so that Human kind may comprehend the world & its impermanent nature!

Meditation and Medicine

2007-12-24T16:25:00.000-08:00

"In Meditation you become an observer who does not judge! Just be an observer, as if you are standing by the side of the road watching the traffic-no judgment, no evaluation, no condemnation, no appreciation-just pure observation."

In the Western world of today there is a famous expression: “Living in the present moment” They also say: “In the here & in the now!” Most of the people who use these expressions do not know their origin. They come from the Satipatthana Sutta. In Sanskrit there is the word: KSHANA, the shortest possible moment. Life is a sum of KSHANAS. Past is gone & future has not yet come. The only moment that exists is the PRESENT. Therefore we should live in the present moment. Sages like Buddha who live in the present moment are not swayed by past worries & unending future projects. Meditation is living in the present moment.

We have to meditate because we need it. We need silence. Otherwise every one becomes mad. If a surgeon who is cutting open a skull of a patient happens to think of his home while the operation is being done the patient’s life would be in danger. He has to be absorbed in his action. He has to be mindful of what he is doing. That is meditation. This is being in Smruti or Sati.

A Brahmin comes to Buddha & asks about his spiritual practice. In response to his question Buddha says: we eat, we sleep, we walk etc. Then Brahmin replies: we also do the same thing. At the Brahmin’s answer Buddha says: But there is a difference; when we eat we know that we eat, when we sleep we know that we sleep, when we walk we know that we walk. This is meditation.

In Buddhism there are three words which are very important:

* Smruti; Samadhi; Prajna

1. Smruti is Mindful awareness
2. Samadhi is Concentration
3. Prajna is Transcendental wisdom

In meditation we should be mindful of our every action. In our daily life mindful awareness offers us tranquillity & inner peace. For instance, a housewife can chop her vegetables by being aware of chopping vegetables without being mentally vagabond. If she continues this way she practices meditation without thinking that she is in meditation! Some people are of the opinion that one has to be older to sit in meditation. This concept is utterly false & baseless. We have to meditate because we need it. We need silence. Otherwise every one becomes mad. If a surgeon who is cutting open a skull of a patient happens to think of his home while the operation is being done the patient’s life would be in danger. He has to be absorbed in his action. He has to be mindful of what he is doing. That is meditation. This is being in Smruti or Sati. While in meditation one can come to a point where he or she understands that there is no separation between him or her and the rest of the world. He or she thus understands non-duality through which automatically arises compassion. That is why in Buddhism Prajna & Karuna are complementary. (Wisdom & Compassion)It is noteworthy to mention that the word charity is derived from Karuna (Karuna-caritas-charity).

While you continue to be in Smruti (mindfully aware) automatically Samadhi (concentration) comes about. While you are in perfect Samadhi, one day Prajna (transcendental wisdom) arises. This is the realization of truth & then you are not shaken by ups & downs of the life. You are safe from all the vicissitudes of fortune. The face of the Buddha is always wreathed in a slight smile! He is not shaken by outside ups & downs.

Analysis & reasoning are not connected to meditation. In Meditation you become an observer who does not judge! Just be an observer, as if you are standing by the side of the road watching the traffic-no judgment, no evaluation, no condemnation, no appreciation-just pure observation. The meditator surpasses death and he experiences the eternity in the KSHANA.

Please read the following poem of William blake:

* To see a World in a Grain of Sand

* And a Heaven in a Wild Flower

* Hold Infinity in the palm of your hand
* And Eternity in an hour

The Austrian scientist Erwin Schrödinger writes thus:

“Eternally & forever, there is only NOW; this one & immutable NOW; the Present is the only thing which has no end.”

In the Garden of the Prophet Khalil Gibran thus says:

“And he answered and said: “Take up now a handful of good earth. Do you find in it a seed, and perhaps a worm? If your hand were spacious and enduring enough, the seed might become a forest, and the worm a flock of angels. And forget not that the years which turn seeds to forests, and worms to angels, belong to this Now, all of the years, this very Now.”

It is interesting to know that Meditation & Medicine are from the same language root. In Sanskrit too Vyadhi & Samadhi are of the same root. Our ancestors had understood the fact that the meditation is a therapy. Today in many hospitals in the USA meditation is practised as a means of treatment.

At present, Neurotheology (a new science discipline) studies the changes that take place in the brain while in meditation. Scientists have found that simple change of thought process would bring about radical changes inside brain. In other words, the effects of meditation are scientifically proved. Enlightenment can be studied and is scientifically proved.

One easy meditation method is Anapanasati. You become aware of your breath. You can meditate on your in-breath & out-breath. While you continue this awareness your mind calms down.

Especially, we are not sufficiently attentive to our breathing. It is this breath that makes us grow, makes our bones solid, but we are not paying due attention to it. We are not grateful to our life-giver. We just let it happen. If you start to breathe mindfully then your mental & physical health ameliorates. Meditation relieves karma.

In many languages the word for the soul & mind is the same as breathing.

* 1. : ANIMA, SPIRITUS (Latin)
2. :PNEUMA, PSYCHE (Greek)
3. :RUAH (Hebrew)

Atman is the German verb for breathing! (Atman is soul in Sanskrit!)

Buddha: In this fathom long body I see the world, its birth & its extinction.

Socrates: Know yourself then you will know gods & the world.

Jesus: The Kingdom of God is in you.

Mohamed: One who knows himself will know the God.

Jalal Uddin Rumy: I looked around me to see the God, but He was not there, then I looked into me & He was there.

Nietzsche: The Kingdom of God is a state which forms itself inside heart.

Death and “RE- INKARMATION”

2007-12-20T03:29:00.000-08:00

The word Death is a taboo in the Western world. Usually the Westerner attempts to conveniently forget it, although it haunts around him every time! Why this fear? He does not believe in rebirth. He thinks every thing is finished with the demise of the body. If he understands that there is neither birth nor death his fear vanishes. Instead of death & birth, there are only manifestations in this world of inter-being. There is only impermanence & in this impermanence the manifestations come about. Nothing has its own existence in this Universe of inter-existence. No permanent self exists. There is only a combination of mental & physical energies. They do not remain the same for two consecutive moments.

"As we live in a world of inter-existence for the Buddhist, death is nothing but a simple transformation. At this moment I remember one documentary film made by a French director on Sri Lanka. I was invited for the release of the said film followed by a discussion. In the film there was a scene of a funeral where people were white-clad. The audience asked me why they were wearing white clothes during a sad moment like death. I explained to them that in our culture the death is not an unhappy incident. For a Buddhist, death is like a change of his or her clothing because he or she believes in rebirth."

We know what Heraclites said: “No person can bathe two times in the same river.” But a Buddhist may say no person can bathe even one time in the same river because the person and the river change in every shortest moment possible. It is a series that continues unbroken, but changes every moment. The series is nothing but movement.

The great Lebanese poet Khalil Gibran says: “You would know the secret of death but how shall you find it unless you seek it in the heart of life.” He also says that the death can not be separated from life and the death and life are one like the sea and the river. Therefore, death and birth are inseparable. These two are nothing but one. According to Buddhism nothing can be created and nothing can be destroyed.

As we live in a world of inter-existence for the Buddhist, death is nothing but a simple transformation. At this moment I remember one documentary film made by a French director on Sri Lanka. I was invited for the release of the said film followed by a discussion. In the film there was a scene of a funeral where people were white-clad. The audience asked me why they were wearing white clothes during a sad moment like death. I explained to them that in our culture the death is not an unhappy incident. For a Buddhist, death is like a change of his or her clothing because he or she believes in rebirth. We take only what we have done with us! We reap what we have sown. It is called KARMA. A French philosopher proposes the word: RE-INKARMATION!

The famous French adage comes to my mind: “He who sows wind reaps tempest!” It is a clear definition for KARMA. Until very recent times death was rarely spoken of in public, in these countries. In France a psychologist who worked for accompaniment of dying people wrote a book called Intimate Death. Since then a lot of people seem to have taken an interest in the subject of death which once was a taboo. A commentary written on the Tibetan book of Death, by a Tibetan Lama has been a bestseller in every corner of the world for some time and I think that it has become an eye-opener for most people living in this hemisphere on the tabooed subject of death. Nowadays Westerners are talking in public on death. The creation of palliative care units was an indirect result of this book. Anyway it is a good sign that death is not purposely ignored.

Karma is what we create by thought, body & word. When we do by body, thought & word a negative act we emit a negative energy to the universe & it follows us! It is very simple. For Karma there is no space & time. Therefore it can easily follow the doer.

I throw a stone to a pond. It falls on water with a flash. It runs down to the bottom & touches the ground of the pond. With it a water ring is born & it goes becoming wider & wider towards the bank. Then it touches the bank & then returns to the stone & exerts force on the stone that made the trouble in the water. Karma is exactly the same.

Jean Paul Sartre has said “L’homme est la somme de ses actes.” (The man is the sum of his acts.) Hegel goes on: “The man is nothing but the series of his acts.” Without being aware they talk of KARMA.

Buddhist KARMA is not SIN. The words KUSALA & AKUSALA are skilful action & unskilful action. In Buddhism there are no original sins. The man is able to change & transcend KARMA. Hence it is not fatalism. Fatalism is the antipode of KARMA
Therefore be careful of RE-INKARMATION!

(Bhikkhu Mandawala Pannawansa Thero is well known Buddhist monk born in Sri Lanka, currently lives in France.)

Muni and Thinker

2007-12-11T13:32:00.000-08:00

Muni is an oriental word which can approximately be translated as Sage. But the word Sage does not give to my mind the exact meaning of the word Muni.

Muni is a silent person. He does not think & instead is absorbed in silent meditation. Mainly in the oriental hemisphere there were Munis & in the Occident there were Thinkers. Socrates is usually presented as a Thinker, but for me he was a Muni who had attained a higher level of spiritual development.(in the morning of the day of his execution one of his disciples came to his prison cell & he found his Master was in a deep & smooth sleep! Several hours ahead of his execution he was sleeping, indeed he was in deep meditation)

"Mind keeps us away from our true nature. If we are lost in intellect & mind our true nature disappears & we become 'artificial'. As we know French surrealists were inspired by the African primitive art which was not guided by intellect. These African artists were "uneducated" "unintellectual". Therefore this primitive art was not corrupt by "intellectualism". It expressed itself without being reined by intellect. Through Silence one can go into his true nature."

The Silence invites us to embark upon an interior journey: a holistic peregrination. Silence is the true nature of man. The opposite of Silence is something which comes from outside.

Every great spiritual master has advocated Silence. Buddha spent 6 years in total silence. Mahavira of Jainism was a silent master. Jesus spent 40 days in the desert, in total silence. Prophet Mohamed observed silence as well.

Dostoevsky writes about Silence:

"For a normal person the temporary solitude is more important than eating & drinking."
Nietzsche also has appreciated silence & solitude:

"He who knows ultimate solitude knows ultimate things."

When Descartes writes: "I think therefore I am" Venerable Thich Nhat Hanh writes: "I do not think, therefore I am." Yes, when we are away from our thoughts our true nature comes out. We can then truly be connected to nature & nature begins to express itself freely in us.

Mind keeps us away from our true nature. If we are lost in intellect & mind our true nature disappears & we become 'artificial'. As we know French surrealists were inspired by the African primitive art which was not guided by intellect. These African artists were "uneducated" "unintellectual". Therefore this primitive art was not corrupt by "intellectualism". It expressed itself without being reined by intellect. Through Silence one can go into his true nature.
Rishis or Munis in the past have discovered Ayurveda etc. through this innermost journey via silence.

One catholic sister named Hildegard Von Bingen in Germany who practised silence in the 13 th century was able to read properties of plants. Her music compositions are incomparable. These talents were exposed because of her silence. Those Munis who composed Ragas were in solitude. One Western musician says: "the silence which is manifest between two notes is more important than the composition!"

When you are in solitude, you become one with everything. To be in solitude does not mean that you are isolated; instead you are directly connected to others, to the Universe.

Every real artist, musician have created their great works while in solitude; in meditation. Einstein was said to be playing the violin when he discovered his famous formula of e=mc². He was in solitude & meditation.

Hence, spare some minutes from the day to be able to be in solitude. You can be in solitude even while travelling by bus or train!

Meeting Ajahn Brahm in a relaxed mood

2007-12-10T04:06:00.000-08:00

About an hour’s drive from Perth in Australia brings us to Serpentine, a quiet hilly suburb where renowned meditation master Ajahn Brahmavamso has his monastery. It’s around ten in the morning and the Thai devotees who had brought the alms spread them out on a table in the alms hall and move out with plates of rice in their hands. They form a queue to serve the monks as they come in. We also join them.

Sharp at 10.30, Ajahn Brahm appears with around 15 monks following him carrying alms bowls. Ever-smiling, he greets us with ‘ayubowan’ as he approaches and accepts a spoonful of rice. The monks walk into the alms hall to serve themselves and we walk upstairs and await their arrival to bless us before they eat. We move out as they start taking the ‘dana’.

“Have your meals and come up for a chat,” Ajahn Brahm tells me. We join the other lay visitors and share the food. The Bodhinyana Buddhist Monastery is in a quiet natural forest - 100 acres in extent. The ‘kuti’ – 21 in all – are spread out amidst the trees. A ‘kuti’ is occupied by a single monk. The monks spend their time meditating.

As much as he preaches the need to lead a simple life, Ajahn Brahm practises what he preaches. A junior monk took us to Ajahn Brahm’s ‘kuti’, built in the style of a rocky cavern just sufficient for him to move about. He uses a thin cushion to sit and meditate. He sleeps by spreading four cushions on the floor. The sound-proof room gets ventilation through small pipes laid in the walls. “Aren’t there facilities for laymen to spend time at the monastery,” I ask Ajahn Brahm. “Not right now,” he says. “Very soon we will provide residential facilities for up to 60 guests in a nearby retreat centre we are building.” A 140-acre block of land has been purchased for this purpose.

Ten individual cottages are being built at the Jhana Grove Retreat Centre containing six bedrooms in each. They are being designed in a way that will allow a great degree of privacy thus maximising the benefit of meditation practice. Connected to the cottages by a central walkway will be a large air-conditioned meditation hall with three adjoining halls to practise walking meditation. A well equipped kitchen along with other facilities for laundry and storage are being provided.

Ajahn Brahm is keen to see that the elderly and the infirm are drawn to the Retreat Centre. “I have observed that those suffering from illnesses, cancer patients in particular, benefit through meditation. At the Retreat Centre we will provide facilities for such persons to learn meditation techniques and strategies in a peaceful environment that is also physically comfortable,” he explains. Serving as patron of the Retreat Centre is the former Premier of Western Australia, Dr. Geoff Gallop who used meditation to help recover from a recent illness.

“Stress has become a major factor throughout the world. It affects the lives of so many individuals. It leads to the break up of families. Meditation relieves stress and tension. It enhances one’s health,” Ajahn Brahm says. “I am hopeful that within 15 months we will have the Centre ready. Thereafter we will offer residential meditation retreats free of charge,” Ajahn Brahm assures.

The project is estimated to cost over Aus$ three million. Funds have been steadily flowing in. The project is undertaken by the Buddhist Society of West Australia. As we get up to leave the monastery, Ajahn Brahm invites us to “Ajahn Brahm’s new year’s eve party” on 31st night at the society’s headquarters. “There won’t be any alcohol but we can contemplate on the effects of alcohol. We will chant ‘pirith’ and bless everyone for the new year,” he assures us.

Burma: A monk's reflection by Bhikkhu Gavesako

2007-10-17T23:24:00.000-07:00

In the last several days, we have seen reports from Burma showing brutal suppression of peaceful demonstrations led by Buddhist monks and nuns chanting the Metta Sutta, asking for social justice and a fair political system.

Many people are wondering now: How can such a thing happen in a country which is supposed to be devoutly Buddhist and a staunch guardian of the scriptural teachings of the Theravada tradition? Aren't monks supposed to be detached from worldly matters and not involved in politics?

As a matter of fact, monks have played a significant role in Burmese history for centuries. The kings have patronised the Sangha and received religious legitimation of their secular power in return.

But this royal patronage has been a mixed blessing for the Sangha: although monks have obtained material support from the rulers, they were also subject to their willful orders all the time. Sometimes the kings used their authority to purge the monastic order and restore its purity (according to their understanding of the concept), and they appointed selected monks as the Sangharajas or "Sangha rulers" to control and administer all the monks in the country, supervised by royal officials at the local level. Anyone who disobeyed was disrobed by force.

Senior monks acted as advisors for the king, but in some cases they became the object of his anger and were killed. Different factions also tried to win the king's favour and his support.

Although we may sometimes read about the "great Buddhist kings of the past" in idealized nationalistic accounts of Burmese history, in reality most of them were cruel and despotic rulers always intent on military campaigns, decimating their neighbours and enslaving the population, forcefully drafting their own people into the army.

They would wage war on other kingdoms in order to get for themselves Buddhist sacred objects (such as relics, scriptures or statues) thought to possess special power. Then they built magnificent religious monuments using slave labour to demonstrate the strength of their empire. In all this, they did not follow the actual Buddhist teachings, but rather used Buddhist icons and symbols to legitimize their absolute right to rule. A righteous king should be possessed of moral qualities such as gentleness (maddava), non-anger (akkodha), non-violence (avihimsa), tolerance (khanti) and uprightness (avirodhana).

"At such time, monks, as rulers are unrighteous (adhammika), their ministers are unrighteous, priests and householders are also unrighteous." (AN ii,74)

So the current situation is nothing new to Burma. Lacking the qualities of charity (dana), honesty (ajjava) and willingness to sacrifice (pariccaga), the current military junta mismanaged the country and then used Buddhist symbols -- imitating the model of previous kings -- to manifest to everybody that it has an absolute power and therefore the right to rule. The Buddha describes the mental process which gives rise to such corrupt behaviour and its inevitable results:

"Craving is dependent on feeling,
seeking is dependent on craving,
acquisition is dependent on seeking,
ascertainment is dependent on acquisition,
desire and passion is dependent on ascertainment,
attachment is dependent on desire and passion,
possessiveness is dependent on attachment,
stinginess is dependent on possessiveness,
defensiveness is dependent on stinginess,
and because of defensiveness, dependent on defensiveness, various
evil, unskillful things arise: the taking up of sticks and knives;
conflicts, quarrels, and disputes; accusations, divisive speech, and
lies." (DN 15)

"A bad man, monks, is possessed of bad states of mind, he associates
with bad men, he thinks as do bad men, he advises as do bad men, he
speaks as do bad men, he acts as do bad men, he has the views of bad
men, he gives gifts as do bad men... And how, monks, does a bad man
act as do bad men? In this case, a bad man is one who kills creatures,
who takes what has not been given, who enjoys himself wrongly." (MN
110)

"He is malevolent in mind, corrupt in thought and purpose, and thinks:
'Let these beings be killed or slaughtered or annihilated or destroyed
or may they not exist.'" (MN 41)

"There is the case where a woman or man is a killer of living beings,
brutal, bloody-handed, given to killing & slaying, showing no mercy to
living beings. Through having adopted & carried out such actions, on
the break-up of the body, after death, he/she reappears in the plane
of deprivation, the bad destination, the lower realms, hell. If, on
the break-up of the body, after death — instead of reappearing in the
plane of deprivation, the bad destination, the lower realms, hell —
he/she comes to the human state, then he/she is short-lived wherever
reborn. There is the case where a woman or man is one who harms beings
with his/her fists, with clods, with sticks, or with knives. Through
having adopted & carried out such actions, on the break-up of the
body, after death, he/she reappears in the plane of deprivation... If
instead he/she comes to the human state, then he/she is sickly
wherever reborn." (MN 135)

"Comparing oneself with others in such terms as 'Just as I am so are
they, just as they are so am I' one should neither kill nor cause
others to kill." (Snp v.705)

"When embraced,
the rod of violence
breeds danger and fear:
Look at people quarreling.
I will tell of how
I experienced
dismay.
Seeing people floundering
like fish in small puddles,
competing with one another --
as I saw this,
fear came into me.
The world was entirely
without substance.
All the directions
were knocked out of line.
Wanting a haven for myself,
I saw nothing that wasn't laid claim to.
Seeing nothing in the end
but competition,
I felt discontent.
And then I saw
an arrow here,
so very hard to see,
embedded in the heart.
Overcome by this arrow
you run in all directions.
But simply on pulling it out
you don't run,
you don't sink...
Whatever things are tied down in the world,
you shouldn't be set on them.
Having totally penetrated
sensual pleasures,
sensual passions,
you should train for your own
Unbinding." (Snp IV.15)

"I see in the world
people with wealth
who, from delusion,
don't make a gift
of the treasure they've gained.
Greedy, they stash it away,
hoping for even more
sensual pleasures.

A king who, by force,
has conquered the world
and rules over the earth
to the edge of the sea,
dissatisfied with the ocean's near shore,
longs for the ocean's
far shore as well.

Kings & others
-- plenty of people --
go to death with craving
unabated. Unsated,
they leave the body behind,
having not had enough
of the world's sensual pleasures. ...

His heirs take over his wealth,
while the being goes on,
in line with his kamma.
No wealth at all
follows the dead one --
not children, wives,
dominion, or riches. ...

Just as an evil thief
caught at the break-in
is destroyed
by his own act,
so evil people
-- after dying, in the next world --
are destroyed
by their own acts." (Thag 16.4)

The military rulers have committed many acts of violence against the general population, especially ethnic minorities, and now they turned their weapons also against the monks. At the same time they appeal to the "religious duties" of the Sangha: they should focus exclusively on the study and practice of the scriptural teachings (divorced from real life) and perform the required rituals (to legitimize the regime), not get involved in any activities that challenge the status quo.

Many of the young monks who were marching in the streets are sons of poor
families who are getting an education through the monastic system, so they are acutely aware of the hard economic situation of ordinary people and their families. "Overturning the bowl" (patta-nikkujjana-kamma) is a symbolic phrase signifying the refusal to accept offerings from a particular person, and thus having nothing
to do with them, which seems pefectly justified in this case.

"The bowl may be overturned for a lay follower endowed with (any of)
eight qualities: He/she strives for the monks' material loss, strives
for the monks' detriment, strives for the monks' non-residence,
insults and reviles monks, causes monks to split from monks, speaks in
dispraise of the Buddha, speaks in dispraise of the Dhamma, speaks in
dispraise of the Sangha. I allow that the bowl be overturned for a lay
follower endowed with (any of) these eight qualities." (Cv. V.20.3)

This will of course make the generals angry with the monks, because it exposes the fallacy of their claim to be practising Buddhism and deprives them of the source of political legitimization.

A Buddhist is someone who has faith in the principle of kamma -- "there are fruits and results of good and bad actions" -- which the military leaders and their hired thugs obviously don't pay any attention to. They try to use the monastic hierarchy (senior monks appointed by them and provided with appropriate status symbols) to suppress the dissenting movement, but formal acts of the Sangha such as this cannot be controlled from the top.

The procedure is that the monks' community meets and agrees to the statement, which -- in a motion and proclamation -- explains the person's wrong doing and announces that the community is overturning its bowl to him/her. The local community should then inform other communities that they, too, are not to accept alms or offerings from the household of that person, who should also be informed about it. It is an attempt to make them mend their ways, and if they do so, the Sangha can decide to turn its bowl upright again.

But it can happen that the worldly powers, having been humiliated, feel no scruples or shame and instead continue in their abusive behaviour towards the monks.

There is a story from the time of the Buddha, when someone from the royal court in Kosambi bore grudge against him and hired rogues to revile him publicly in the street, using coarse language. When the monks were collecting alms food in the morning, words of abuse were hurled at them by these people. So Ananda approached the Buddha and suggested that it might be better to leave the town and go somewhere else.

The Buddha replied:

"But suppose, Ananda, that we are ill-treated and abused in the next place we go, what shall we do then?"
"Then we shall go to some other place," said Ananda.
"And if we are reviled in that new place too, what shall we do then?"
"Then we shall go to some other place," replied Ananda.
"No, Ananda, that is not the proper way. Wherever a difficulty arises,
right there it should be resolved. Only then should one move. I am
like a battle elephant who patiently endures the arrows that are shot
from all directions. In the same way, I will endure these abusive
words. This will only continue for seven days and then the people will
know." (Dhammapada Commentary)

A similar case happened when the Brahman Akkosaka ("Insulter") Bharadvaja, angered and displeased, went to the Buddha and, on arrival, insulted and cursed him with rude, harsh words.

When this was said, the Blessed One said to him: "What do you think, Brahman: Do friends and colleagues, relatives and kinsmen come to you as guests?"
"Yes, Master Gotama, sometimes friends and colleagues, relatives and kinsmen come to me as guests."

"And what do you think: Do you serve them with staple and non-staple
foods and delicacies?"

"Yes, sometimes I serve them with staple and non-staple foods and delicacies."
"And if they don't accept them, to whom do those foods belong?"
"If they don't accept them, Master Gotama, those foods are all mine."
"In the same way, Brahman, that with which you have insulted me, who
is not insulting; that with which you have taunted me, who is not
taunting; that with which you have berated me, who is not berating:
that I don't accept from you. It's all yours, Brahman. It's all yours.
"Whoever returns insult to one who is insulting, returns taunts to one
who is taunting, returns a berating to one who is berating, is said to
be eating together, sharing company, with that person. But I am
neither eating together nor sharing your company, Brahman. It's all
yours. It's all yours." (SN VII.2)

So in a way, the Buddha turned his bowl upside down to the brahman and did not receive his "offerings". As we can see from the following passages, these are the occasions for cultivating spiritual strength and even gaining insight into the nature of the body, because one's awareness is firmly in the present moment due to having been threatened.

"It doesn't matter
whether he thinks,
'He's forbearing
out of fear of me.'
One's own true good
is the foremost good.
Nothing better
than patience
is found.
Whoever, when strong,
is forbearing
to one who is weak:
that's the foremost patience.
The weak must constantly endure.
They call that strength
no strength at all:
whoever's strength
is the strength of a fool.
There's no reproach
for one who is strong,
guarding -- guarded by -- Dhamma.
You make things worse
when you flare up
at someone who's angry.
Whoever doesn't flare up
at someone who's angry
wins a battle hard to win.
You live for the good of both
-- your own, the other's --
when, knowing the other's provoked,
you mindfully grow calm.
When you work the cure of both
-- your own, the other's --
those who think you a fool
know nothing of Dhamma." (SN XI.5)

"Monks, when liberation of the mind by friendliness (metta) is
ardently practiced, developed, unrelentingly resorted to, used as
one's vehicle, made the foundation of one's life, fully established,
well consolidated and perfected, then these eleven blessings may be
expected. What eleven?

One sleeps happily; one wakes happily; one does not suffer bad dreams;
one is dear to human beings; one is dear to non-human beings; the gods
protect one; no fire or poison or weapon harms one; one's mind gets
quickly concentrated; the expression of one's face is serene; one dies
unperturbed; and even if one fails to attain higher states, one will
at least reach the state of the Brahma world." (AN 11.16)

"Having killed what
do you sleep in ease?
Having killed what
do you not grieve?
Of the slaying
of what one thing
does Gotama approve?"

"Having killed anger
you sleep in ease.
Having killed anger
you do not grieve.
The noble ones praise
the slaying of anger
-- with its honeyed crest
& poison root --
for having killed it
you do not grieve." (SN 1.71)

"Monks, there are these five aspects of speech by which others may
address you: timely or untimely, true or false, affectionate or harsh,
beneficial or unbeneficial, with a mind of good-will or with inner
hate. Others may address you in a timely way or an untimely way. They
may address you with what is true or what is false. They may address
you in an affectionate way or a harsh way. They may address you in a
beneficial way or an unbeneficial way. They may address you with a
mind of good-will or with inner hate. In any event, you should train
yourselves: 'Our minds will be unaffected and we will say no evil
words. We will remain sympathetic to that person's welfare, with a
mind of good will, and with no inner hate. We will keep pervading him
with an awareness imbued with good will and, beginning with him, we
will keep pervading the entire world with an awareness imbued with
good will -- abundant, expansive, immeasurable, free from hostility,
free from ill will.' That's how you should train yourselves." (MN 21)

"Now if other people insult, malign, exasperate, & harass a monk, he
discerns that 'A painful feeling, born of ear-contact, has arisen
within me. And that is dependent, not independent. Dependent on what?
Dependent on contact.' And he sees that contact is inconstant, feeling
is inconstant, perception is inconstant, consciousness is inconstant.
His mind, with the [earth] element as its object/support, leaps up,
grows confident, steadfast, & released.
And if other people attack the monk in ways that are undesirable,
displeasing, & disagreeable -- through contact with fists, contact
with stones, contact with sticks, or contact with knives -- the monk
discerns that 'This body is of such a nature contacts with fists come,
contacts with stones come, contacts with sticks come, & contacts with
knives come. Now the Blessed One has said, in his exhortation of the
simile of the saw, 'Monks, even if bandits were to carve you up
savagely, limb by limb, with a two-handled saw, he among you who let
his heart get angered even at that would not be doing my bidding.' So
my persistence will be aroused &
untiring, my mindfulness established & unconfused, my body calm &
unaroused, my mind centered & unified. And now let contact with fists
come to this body, let contact with stones, with sticks, with knives
come to this body, for this is how the Buddha's bidding is done." (MN
28)

"Well then, Punna. Now that I have instructed you with a brief
instruction, in which country are you going to live?"
"Lord, there is a country called Sunaparanta. I am going to live there."
"Punna, the Sunaparanta people are fierce. They are rough. If they
insult and ridicule you, what will you think?"
"If they insult and ridicule me, I will think, 'These Sunaparanta
people are civilized, very civilized, in that they don't hit me with
their hands.' That is what I will think, O Blessed One. That is what I
will think, O One Well-gone."
"But if they hit you with their hands, what will you think?"
"...I will think, 'These Sunaparanta people are civilized, very
civilized, in that they don't hit me with a clod'..."
"But if they hit you with a clod...?"
"...I will think, 'These Sunaparanta people are civilized, very
civilized, in that they don't hit me with a stick'..."
"But if they hit you with a stick...?"
"...I will think, 'These Sunaparanta people are civilized, very
civilized, in that they don't hit me with a knife'..."
"But if they hit you with a knife...?"
"...I will think, 'These Sunaparanta people are civilized, very
civilized, in that they don't take my life with a sharp knife'..."
"But if they take your life with a sharp knife...?"
"If they take my life with a sharp knife, I will think, 'there are
disciples of the Blessed One who -- horrified, humiliated, and
disgusted by the body and by life -- have sought for an assassin, but
here I have met my assassin without searching for him.' That is what I
will think, Blessed One."
"Good, Punna, very good. Possessing such calm and self-control you are
fit to dwell among the Sunaparantans. Now it is time to do as you see
fit." (SN XXXV.88)

In the story of the arahant Adhimutta, he was surrounded by bandits who were threatening to kill him. The bandit chief was surprised to see no trembling and fear in him. Adhimutta explains why he has no fear:

"There are no painful mental states, chieftain,
in one without longing.
In one whose fetters are ended,
all fears are overcome.
With the ending of [craving]
the guide to becoming,
when phenomena are seen
for what they are,
then just as in the laying down of a burden,
there's no fear in death.

I've lived well the holy life,
well-developed the path.
Death holds no fear for me.
It's like the end of a disease.

I've lived well the holy life,
well-developed the path,
seen states of becoming
as devoid of allure,
like poison spit out
after it's drunk.

One gone to the far shore
without clinging
without effluent
his task completed,
welcomes the ending of life,
as if freed from a place of execution.
Having attained the supreme Rightness,
unconcerned with all the world,
as if released from a burning house,
he doesn't sorrow at death.

Whatever's compounded,
wherever a state of becoming's obtained,
all that has no one in charge:
so says the Great Seer.
Whoever discerns this,
as taught by the Awakened One,
would no more grasp hold of any state of becoming
than he would a hot iron ball.
I have no 'I was,'
no 'I will be.'
Fabrications will simply go out of existence.
What's to lament there in that?
For one who sees, as it actually is,
the pure arising of phenomena,
the pure series of fabrications,
there's no fear.
When seeing the world with discernment
as on a par with grass & twigs,
finding no 'mine-ness,'
thinking, 'There's nothing of mine,'
he feels no sorrow.
Dissatisfied with this carcass,
I'm unconcerned with becoming.
This body will break up
and there will not be another.
Do as you like with this carcass.
From that I will feel
neither hatred nor love." (Thag 16.8)

The nun Upacala also describes the dangers inherent in existence and
her motivation for transcending the round of rebirth:

"For one who is born there is death;
the cutting-off of hands and feet,
slaughter, bonds and calamity.
One who is born goes to pain." (Thig 191)

"May I never lie
with my head cracked open
again." (Thag 2.16)

"Furthermore, the monk living in the wilderness reminds himself of
this: I am now living alone in the wilderness. While I am living alone
in the wilderness, I might meet up with youths on their way to
committing a crime or on their way back. They might take my life. That
would be how my death would come about. That would be an obstruction
for me. So let me make an effort for the attaining of the
as-yet-unattained, the reaching of the as-yet-unreached, the
realization of the as-yet-unrealized.
This is the fourth future danger that is just enough, when considered,
for a monk living in the wilderness -- heedful, ardent, and resolute
-- to live for the attaining of the as-yet-unattained, the reaching of
the as-yet-unreached, the realization of the as-yet-unrealized." (AN
5.77)

"Furthermore, the monk reminds himself of this: At present people are
in harmony, on friendly terms, without quarreling, like milk mixed
with water, viewing one another with eyes of affection. The time will
come, though, when there is danger and an invasion of savage tribes.
Taking power, they will surround the countryside. When there is
danger, people will congregate where it is safe. There they will live
packed and crowded together. When one is living packed and crowded
together, it is not easy to pay attention to the Buddha's teachings.
It is not easy to reside in isolated forest or wilderness dwellings.
Before this unwelcome, disagreeable, displeasing thing happens, let me
first make an effort for the attaining of the as-yet-unattained, the
reaching of the as-yet-unreached, the realization of the
as-yet-unrealized, so that -- endowed with that Dhamma -- I will live
in peace even when there is danger.
This is the fourth future danger that is just enough, when considered,
for a monk -- heedful, ardent, and resolute -- to live for the
attaining of the as-yet-unattained, the reaching of the
as-yet-unreached, the realization of the as-yet-unrealized." (AN 5.78)

Or as Sariputta puts it, we are in a situation with little choice:

"On both sides there is death, not non-death, either afterwards or before; enter
on the way; do not perish. Let not the opportunity pass you by." (Thag. 1004)

There is an urgent task to be done for those walking the path to liberation. These reflections can help us keep our goal in mind and "not let the moment (for practice) slip by". To be living in a "suitable country" (patirupa desa) is considered to be one of the highest blessings. Those of us who are fortunate enough to be living in freedom from fear and oppression should not forget that other people -- our friends in birth, aging, sickness and death -- are suffering at the same time, and we should do what we can to promote their freedom, too.

(http://www.buddhistchannel.tv)

The Five Hindrances by Ajahn Brahmavamso

2007-09-28T00:07:00.000-07:00

The major obstacles to successful meditation and liberating insight take the form of one or more of the Five Hindrances. The whole practice leading to Enlightenment can be well expressed as the effort to overcome the Five Hindrances, at first suppressing them temporarily in order to experience Jhana and Insight, and then overcoming them permanently through the full development of the Noble Eightfold Path.

So, what are these Five Hindrances? They are:

KAMACCHANDA : Sensory Desire
VYAPADA : Ill Will
THINA-MIDDHA: Sloth and Torpor
UDDHACCA-KUKKUCCA : Restlessness and Remorse
VICIKICCHA : Doubt

1. Sensory desire refers to that particular type of wanting that seeks for happiness through the five senses of sight, sound, smell, taste and physical feeling. It specifically excludes any aspiration for happiness through the sixth sense of mind alone.

In its extreme form, sensory desire is an obsession to find pleasure in such things as sexual intimacy, good food or fine music. But it also includes the desire to replace irritating or even painful five-sense experiences with pleasant ones, i.e. the desire for sensory comfort.

The Lord Buddha compared sensory desire to taking out a loan. Any pleasure one experiences through these five senses must be repaid through the unpleasantness of separation, loss or hungry emptiness which follow relentlessly when the pleasure is used up. As with any loan, there is also the matter of interest and thus, as the Lord Buddha said, the pleasure is small compared to the suffering repaid.

In meditation, one transcends sensory desire for the period by letting go of concern for this body and its five sense activity. Some imagine that the five senses are there to serve and protect the body, but the truth is that the body is there to serve the five senses as they play in the world ever seeking delight. Indeed, the Lord Buddha once said, "The five senses ARE the world" and to leave the world, to enjoy the other worldly bliss of Jhana, one must give up for a time ALL concern for the body and its five senses.

When sensory desire is transcended, the mind of the meditator has no interest in the promise of pleasure or even comfort with this body. The body disappears and the five senses all switch off. The mind becomes calm and free to look within. The difference between the five sense activity and its transcendence is like the difference between looking out of a window and looking in a mirror. The mind that is free from five sense activity can truly look within and see its real nature. Only from that can wisdom arise as to what we are, from where and why?!

2. Ill will refers to the desire to punish, hurt or destroy. It includes sheer hatred of a person, or even a situation, and it can generate so much energy that it is both seductive and addictive. At the time, it always appears justified for such is its power that it easily corrupts our ability to judge fairly. It also includes ill will towards oneself, otherwise known as guilt, which denies oneself any possibility of happiness. In meditation, ill will can appear as dislike towards the meditation object itself, rejecting it so that one's attention is forced to wander elsewhere.

The Lord Buddha likened ill will to being sick. Just as sickness denies one the freedom and happiness of health, so ill will denies one the freedom and happiness of peace.

Ill will is overcome by applying Metta, loving kindness. When it is ill will towards a person, Metta teaches one to see more in that person than all that which hurts you, to understand why that person hurt you (often because they were hurting intensely themselves), and encourages one to put aside one's own pain to look with compassion on the other. But if this is more than one can do, Metta to oneself leads one to refuse to dwell in ill will to that person, so as to stop them from hurting you further with the memory of those deeds. Similarly, if it is ill will towards oneself, Metta sees more than one's own faults, can understand one's own faults, and finds the courage to forgive them, learn from their lesson and let them go. Then, if it is ill will towards the mediation object (often the reason why a meditator cannot find peace) Metta embraces the meditation object with care and delight. For example, just as a mother has a natural Metta towards her child, so a meditator can look on their breath, say, with the very same quality of caring attention. Then it will be just as unlikely to lose the breath through forgetfulness as it is unlikely for a mother to forget her baby in the shopping mall, and it would be just as improbable to drop the breath for some distracting thought as it is for a distracted mother to drop her baby! When ill will is overcome, it allows lasting relationships with other people, with oneself and, in meditation, a lasting, enjoyable relationship with the meditation object, one that can mature into the full embrace of absorption.

3. Sloth and torpor refers to that heaviness of body and dullness of mind which drag one down into disabling inertia and thick depression. The Lord Buddha compared it to being imprisoned in a cramped, dark cell, unable to move freely in the bright sunshine outside. In meditation, it causes weak and intermittent mindfulness which can even lead to falling asleep in meditation without even realising it!

Sloth and torpor is overcome by rousing energy. Energy is always available but few know how to turn on the switch, as it were. Setting a goal, a reasonable goal, is a wise and effective way to generate energy, as is deliberately developing interest in the task at hand. A young child has a natural interest, and consequent energy, because its world is so new. Thus, if one can learn to look at one's life, or one's meditation, with a 'beginner's mind' one can see ever new angles and fresh possibilities which keep one distant from sloth and torpor, alive and energetic. Similarly, one can develop delight in whatever one is doing by training one's perception to see the beautiful in the ordinary, thereby generating the interest which avoids the half-death that is sloth and torpor.

The mind has two main functions, 'doing' and 'knowing'. The way of meditation is to calm the 'doing' to complete tranquillity while maintaining the 'knowing'. Sloth and torpor occur when one carelessly calms both the 'doing' and the 'knowing', unable to distinguish between them.

Sloth and torpor is a common problem which can creep up and smother one slowly. A skilful meditator keeps a sharp look-out for the first signs of sloth and torpor and is thus able to spot its approach and take evasive action before it's too late. Like coming to a fork in a road, one can take that mental path leading away from sloth and torpor. Sloth and torpor is an unpleasant state of body and mind, too stiff to leap into the bliss of Jhana and too blinded to spot any insights. In short, it is a complete waste of precious time.

4. Restlessness refers to a mind which is like a monkey, always swinging on to the next branch, never able to stay long with anything. It is caused by the fault-finding state of mind which cannot be satisfied with things as they are, and so has to move on to the promise of something better, forever just beyond.

The Lord Buddha compared restlessness to being a slave, continually having to jump to the orders of a tyrannical boss who always demands perfection and so never lets one stop.

Restlessness is overcome by developing contentment, which is the opposite of fault-finding. One learns the simple joy of being satisfied with little, rather than always wanting more. One is grateful for this moment, rather than picking out its deficiencies. For instance, in meditation restlessness is often the impatience to move quickly on to the next stage. The fastest progress, though is achieved by those who are content with the stage they are on now. It is the deepening of that contentment that ripens into the next stage. So be careful of 'wanting to get on with it' and instead learn how to rest in appreciative contentment. That way, the 'doing' disappears and the meditation blossoms.

Remorse refers to a specific type of restlessness which is the kammic effect of one's misdeeds. The only way to overcome remorse, the restlessness of a bad conscience, is to purify one's virtue and become kind, wise and gentle. It is virtually impossible for the immoral or the self indulgent to make deep progress in meditation.

5. Doubt refers to the disturbing inner questions at a time when one should be silently moving deeper. Doubt can question one's own ability "Can I do This?", or question the method "Is this the right way?", or even question the meaning "What is this?". It should be remembered that such questions are obstacles to meditation because they are asked at the wrong time and thus become an intrusion, obscuring one's clarity.

The Lord Buddha likened doubt to being lost in a desert, not recognising any landmarks.

Such doubt is overcome by gathering clear instructions, having a good map, so that one can recognise the subtle landmarks in the unfamiliar territory of deep meditation and so know which way to go. Doubt in one's ability is overcome by nurturing self confidence with a good teacher. A meditation teacher is like a coach who convinces the sports team that they can succeed. The Lord Buddha stated that one can, one will, reach Jhana and Enlightenment if one carefully and patiently follows the instructions. The only uncertainty is 'when'! Experience also overcomes doubt about one's ability and also doubt whether this is the right path. As one realised for oneself the beautiful stages of the path, one discovers that one is indeed capable of the very highest, and that this is the path that leads one there.

The doubt that takes the form of constant assessing "Is this Jhana?" "How am I going?", is overcome by realising that such questions are best left to the end, to the final couple of minutes of the meditation. A jury only makes its judgement at the end of the trial, when all the evidence has been presented. Similarly, a skilful meditator pursues a silent gathering of evidence, reviewing it only at the end to uncover its meaning.

The end of doubt, in meditation, is described by a mind which has full trust in the silence, and so doesn't interfere with any inner speech. Like having a good chauffeur, one sits silently on the journey out of trust in the driver.

Any problem which arises in meditation will be one of these Five Hindrances, or a combination. So, if one experiences any difficulty, use the scheme of the Five Hindrances as a 'check list' to identify the main problem. Then you will know the appropriate remedy, apply it carefully, and go beyond the obstacle into deeper meditation.

When the Five Hindrances are fully overcome, there is no barrier between the meditator and the bliss of Jhana. Therefore, the certain test that these Five Hindrances are really overcome is the ability to access Jhana.

More than 60 young children ordained as Samaneras

2007-09-26T03:21:00.000-07:00

More than 60 young children were ordained as Samaneras to mark the 38th birthday of Ven, Kolonnawe Sumangala Thera at Devuramvehera in Pannipitiya yesterday. Two Samaneras are seen here with their ‘Pindapatha’ bowls prior to a Sanghika dana which followed the ordination ceremony.

Ayan Vassana Kalo – this is the Rainy Season – Binara – Moratorium month

2007-09-26T03:19:00.000-07:00

Wassana Kala or the rainy season from Esala (July/August) to Vap – (October/November) can be regarded as a four-month moratorium for Buddhist priests who observe methods of meditation to gain merit.

After his enlightenment, Buddha set apart this period for the monks to observe methods of meditation. Monks learnt the methods of mediation from the Buddha and observed the law of qualities, efficacy and moral philosophy at places where they sojourned during the Wassana Kala - the rainy season

These practices were observed by the community of monks and even today this is the opportune period for the monks to complete performances of religious duties and observances as prerequisites to Buddhaship, including the endurance of the suffering and privation of every kind and the loss of life itself in the discharge of those duties. Thus, during this period the aspirants of Buddahood and nibbhana observe ten seelaskandha – the whole body of moral and religious duties.

This is the period of the year when laymen too gain merit by ministering serving or attending to monks who observe methods of meditation and observing the law of qualities themselves. Thus this is the “Savwanak Pirisa” the Buddhist community or assembly of four kinds viz Bhikkhu-monks, Bhikkhuni-nuns, Upasaka – lay male devotees and uipasika –lay female devotees accumulate merit.

There are thirteen passion subduing ordinances to be observed by Buddhist priests. “Pansukulikangaya” – Rubbish heap ordinance, which enjoins the priests to wear robes made form cast off clothes on rubbish-heaps dunghills etc.

“The Cheewarikangaya” – Three robes ordinance which requires that the Buddhist priests dress shall be a particular kind and consist of three parts – “Andanaya” – under garment. “Thanipata Sivura” single robe and “Depata Sivura” double robe. Even when bathing no other robe or cloth should be worn.

“Pindapathikangaya” – Buddhist priests ordinance of mendicancy or begging with the bowl.

Sapadanachanikangaya – “Sa”- with “Padana” – alms, “Charika” itinerant, “Augaya” Section or ordinance, which requires the priests to procure food by begging from house to house.

“Ekasanikagaya” – Buddhist priests ordinance relating to the use of only one seat when eating offerings.

“Paththapendi kangaya” – “paththa” bowel “Puidika” – rice eating “angaya” – Section or ordinance, Ordinance which enjoins a Buddhist priest to take food only on one platter or bowl.

“Pasnchha Bhasleththi kangaya” (Bhaththika Angaya) After eating ordinance viz the ordinance which requires a Buddhist priest to take only one meal a day and that exactly at mid day.

“Aranya kangaya” Buddhist priest dwelling ordinance which requires the priests to reside in forests or solitary places.

“Rukhamuli kangaya” ordinance which enjoins upon the Buddhist priests always to lodge at the foot of a tree affords.

“Abbokasi kangaya” – Open air ordinance, viz the ordinance in Buddhism which requires monks to live altogether without shelter.

“Sassani kangaya” The ordinance of the Buddhist priest which enjoins devout meditation in a burial ground at midnight.

“Yathasaththa thikangaya” - “Yatha – as “Saththathika – spread, “Angaya” Section or ordinance.

Ordinance enjoining upon the Buddhist priests not to shift or alter the net or bed when spread out to repose on. As it is laid down so it must remain.

“Sajji kangaya” the ordinance requiring Buddhist priests not to lie down, but to sleep in a suiting position. Out of the four positions of the body the Buddhist priests who observe the passion subduing ordinances are required to sue only sitting, standing and walking positions and not the reclining posture. Further they should not confine to a single posture. For instance they should not be seated throughout, but should rotate. By going to observe this ordinance Chakkupala Thera who did not sleep lost his sight. He had not told anyone that he was observing passion subduing ordinances.

Bhikkhus or monks may observe all these thirteen passion - subduing ordinance but Bhikkhunis or nuns are allowed to observe only eight of them. They should not observe the other five ordinances as it is not convenient for them to observe these five ordinances. The observance of these five ordinances is not proper for Bhikkhunis.

Wassana Kala or the rainy season is the period when the clergy as well as the laymen engage in religious activities including Dana - Charity –Seela – Morals and Bhawana – Meditation. In Buddhist countries like Thailand and Myanmar students in educational institutions including schools are given holidays during the period to enable the students to engage in religious activities. In our country too religious activities are performed daily during the Wassana Kala.

Binara Full Moon day is of special significance to us in Sri Lanka because on this day that the annual religious festivals of Seruwawila Mangala Maha Seya is held. It is in Seruwawila that the Fore head Relic of Gauthama Buddha is treasured, Girihanduseya annual festival is also held on this day. Girihanduseya is sacred because the Hair relic brought to Sri Lanka by two merchant brothers Tapassu and Bhalluka is treasured.

When Gauthama Buddha was spending the seventh week after the Enlightenment under the Rajayathana Kiripalu tree two merchant brothers who came from the cities of Uthkala offered him “Aggala” sweet balls made of flour and honey. Buddha had given them hair relic which they brought to Sri Lanka and treasured in Girihanduseya built in the Eastern coast.

(http://www.dailymirror.lk/2007/09/26/feat/02.asp)

Dukka and investigation of suffering By Ajahn Brahmavanso

2007-09-26T03:18:00.000-07:00

Chief Prelate of the Bodhinyana Monastery in Perth, Australia

We seek for happiness in so many areas and in so many ways, always seeking in the wrong place. Eventually we realise that not finding happiness in these places doesn't mean there is something wrong with us. It doesn't mean we are incompetent or hopeless. Insight will show us that there is no way anyone can find happiness in the place we were looking. The mind realises that the world can only be dukkha (suffering). The wise person, instead of being distressed by that suffering and wallowing in it, contemplates what The Lord Buddha says about suffering, the Four Noble Truths. That means, they seek to understand this whole process of suffering.

Sometimes the suffering can be raw, going deep into the bones, even deeper than the bones, right to the very source of what we think we are. It goes so deep and can cause so many problems. It's such a relief to find out that this is par for the course, that there's nothing wrong with this. This is the nature of the world. What do we expect?

Sometimes we go about with the false expectation that if we're clever enough, if we're smart enough, if we keep all the rules and do all the right things, somehow we can have a happy life. Sometimes we think everybody is happy but me. What we need to understand is that there is nothing special with us, and that as we practise in this monastery these are things that everyone has to deal with. We're going against the stream, and we can expect to feel the pressure of the defilements, just in the same way as when we go against the wind we can feel the force against our bodies. This is a sign we are getting somewhere.

Wisdom Power Better Than Will Power

You will find that when suffering arises, you have two options. You can either try to escape from the suffering or you can investigate it.

The way of Buddhism is to investigate suffering, not to fight it. Because if you fight you will find that you just get more and more suffering. Instead, use wisdom power rather than will power. Wisdom power is always much more effective because it's coming from a good place. Will power, in nearly all cases, comes from ego, from self, and you cannot expect it to produce results if it's coming from such an unfortunate source.

To use wisdom power means remembering the Teachings and looking at your experience in the framework of those teachings, the framework of the Four Noble Truths. The Lord Buddha taught that birth is suffering, old age, sickness and death are suffering. And all that goes in between is also suffering. In brief, life is suffering. So when suffering comes – as disappointment, as frustration, as loneliness or depression, or as wondering what you're supposed to be doing – you're seeing here a basic truth of nature which every human being, whether in a monastery or outside, must come across from time to time in their lives.

There are times when you don't know what to do because the suffering is so bad. The thing to do when suffering arises is to investigate. To investigate means to watch and to observe in silence. You have to watch without interfering, without getting involved, because if you get involved you're not watching fully.

It requires courage and strength to stand your ground and just watch. One of the things you will see is that suffering passes and it always passes into happiness. This is the play of sansara (the perpetual wandering from life to life), the play of night and day, the play of warmth and cold. It is the basic duality of experience. There is no escape from that in this realm or in any other realm. It will always follow you around, this duality of experience.

The Lord Buddha said that getting what you don't want is suffering and not getting what you do want is also suffering. I often ask myself, "Just what do I want?" I use that as a mantra as I walk along the meditation path, or as I sit if my mind is restless. "What do I want?" I've been in this world long enough now - forty-eight years - and I have experienced much of this world. I wasn't born in a monastery, and from all that I have experienced and seen, from all that I have known, I know there is not a corner of this world where I can find happiness[1]. By its very nature, sensory experience is going to be disappointing, and I know that if I ask for something the world can never give me, I will suffer. When I crave for something I cannot reach, I know I am just torturing myself more than necessary.

Putting Make-Up On The Mirror

Instead of craving for something else you learn to be content with what you have. When you talk about contentment you are talking about the Third Noble Truth. The Third Noble Truth is letting go of craving. Contentment is the letting go of wanting something else. It is learning to be at peace with what you have. This is where in this struggle - and it is always a struggle you can be at peace. How can you be content when everything is going wrong? How can you be content when the body is on fire with pain? How can you be at peace and content when the mind is going crazy with so many thoughts? Even in these situations you can find contentment in letting go, letting go of the 'controller'.

It's just like when one sees oneself in the mirror, and sees this ugly person, but instead of actually doing something with one's face, one puts make up on the mirror. One tries to make the mirror look good! Of course, it's a complete waste of time. The mirror might look good for a while with all the make up on it, but when one walks somewhere else and sees another mirror one is back to square one again. Putting make up on the mirror is like trying to solve the 'outside' by craving instead of trying to solve the 'inside' through contentment

The way that craving works, the Second Noble Truth, is to delude you into thinking that if you just try and do a little bit more, if you just strive harder, work harder for just one more day, then everything will be O.K. "I'll just work another year and I'll pay off my mortgage." "I'll just sit for one more retreat, that's all I need, and I'll get my Jhanas." "There's this one last course of medicine then I'll be healthy again." You might put off sickness for a while, but you'll never escape it. It's just the nature of the body. You might put off suffering for a while, but you'll never escape it in that way. You're just putting it off.

(http://www.dailymirror.lk/2007/09/26/feat/01.asp)

Benefits of Long-Term Meditation by Mahathera Henepola Gunaratana

2007-09-25T03:03:00.001-07:00

Spending time in a retreat is like recharging a battery. Once you have charged a battery, you donít let it just sit around. You install it in an appliance and use it until it runs out. Then you recharge it. Similarly, when you need to recharge yourself you go for retreats.

The difference between charging a battery and going for a retreat is that the length of time spent in a retreat cannot really be equated with the time you charge a battery. If you charge a battery longer, that does not mean it can run longer. Once the battery has reached full capacity it cannot be charged any more. Charging after that point is useless. But this does not happen when you go on a long-term retreat.

First, before you go for long retreats, you should have undertaken short weekend retreats. Also, be aware of the length of the longer retreat you hope to accomplish -- ten days, twenty days, a month, three months, or a year or two?

You have to prepare your mind and body for a long retreat. You do this by attending several graduated short retreats that last a weekend, three days, a week, ten days, two weeks and a month. Once you know you can handle a weekend retreat comfortably then go to the next longer one. When you know you can handle that retreat easily, move on up to the next longer one.

PREPARING YOURSELF

Sometimes even a weekend retreat is boring and painful if you are not prepared. How can you prepare your mind? When you go for a retreat, don't bring your office with you. Leave it behind. People are generally unable to let go of their work. They are used to their daily and weekly routines full of TV, company, gossip, uncontrolled eating, drink, drugs, sex, travel, etc. When they go for retreats they have to let go of most of these routines.

Since they are accustomed to working under great pressure, even in retreats they are tense and anxious. They want to get something out of meditation as quickly as possible and then get back to their work. Don't go for retreat in this frame of mind. Try to think that you have left everything behind for a while and now you have all the time in the world. Nobody -- no work, nothing -- is going to bother you. Use all the time for your practice.

What happens to you if you do not have this kind of attitude is that you begin to feel bored and tired of meditation. You find meditation is a waste of time. You are in the same situation as when you were at work or at home or with company. If you start your retreat with this attitude, you will wish to achieve some benefit as quickly as possible, and to go home or to work to enjoy what you have been doing before you went for the retreat.

Moreover, in a short retreat you experience a great deal of pain and discomfort. As you become impatient, your aches and pains become more acute. Naturally, in a short retreat you experience more physical discomfort, for you are not used to sitting in one place for a long time or to staying in one place for a long period of time by yourself without listening to radio or watching TV, or without chatting with somebody or reading a newspaper, or perhaps doing some computer work. When you try to look at yourself introspectively, taking stock of the garbage you have within yourself, you experience a great deal of discomfort.

How much time do you have in a weekend retreat? Not more than two days. Before the body gets adjusted to the new situation, the new practice, the new discipline, the retreat time or your holiday time is over. Then you may conclude that all you got from a retreat is aches and pains all over your body. Or boredom. Then you decide never to go for a retreat again. As you have not had any previous retreat experiences, what you don't know is that it takes a couple of days for your body to become adjusted. Short retreats, however, are beneficial for preparing yourself for a long retreat.

GROUP SUPPORT

People who have done meditation by themselves on their own should expect to face courageously whatever arises in their bodies and minds. Meditating alone by oneself is also beneficial in that you can make your own schedule. You can avoid any human contact. You can chose a quiet place. Even when you go to a group meditation, you meditate by yourself without worrying about other meditators.

However, group meditation also has its own benefits. When you are in a group you receive silent group support. When you feel depressed or disheartened or disappointed you can notice others meditating. When you see them, you feel encouraged. You may think: if they can do it, I can too. Let me try it. Also, in group meditation there are times for Dhamma discussion and you can benefit from that.

In a short-term retreat, you hardly settle down and get used to the new way of looking at yourself before the retreat is over. Moreover, as we have mentioned earlier, your mind is fully preoccupied with the pain and discomfort you are going through during the whole period of a short retreat. This does not permit you to pay any attention to the changes taking place all the time.

The benefits of a longer retreat are many. You can see the changes in the aggregates taking place every moment. In long-term retreats, you have plenty of time to get over those difficulties. Noticing changes in your body and mind is a very good way to learn to overcome your hatred which keeps nagging you all the time. As long as anger troubles you, you cannot meditate properly.

Secondly, you can see clearly the connection between your intense greed and continuous suffering. Third, you can very succinctly notice the total phenomenon of your life operating without anything permanent in it, just like an ever-running machine. You realize there is nothing you can do to stop the process of growing, but to accept it cheerfully. This is where you will achieve real relaxation, real joy and real happiness, which can be equated with eternal bliss. This is where you see that all the aggregates are inseparably functioning together.

This acceptance of yourself is the beginning of an entirely new life. This is where you are firmly rooted in your practice. Prior to this experience you would go from retreat to retreat, looking for a better teacher or a better meditation system. Now you realize you have found it within yourself. You don't need to go anywhere, seeking another new teacher. Prior to this you would have been pretending to know meditation, possibly even teaching meditation, without knowing what you yourself were doing. Now you realize that this entire rat race is simply a waste of your time and energy.

Mindfulness of Feeling by Mahathera Henepola Gunaratana

2007-09-25T03:01:00.000-07:00

One quarter of the Buddha's teaching is based on feeling, which is the first truth that he taught for forty-five years. It is in not understanding this truth that we are leashed to repetition of birth and death in one form or another. To a lesser degree it also is one of the four foundations of mindfulness as outlined by the Buddha in several Suttas. An ordinary person and a more enlightened one differ from each other in their response to feelings. While an ordinary person, for instance, would cling to the pleasant feeling and reject the unpleasant, the more enlightened one neither clings to the pleasant nor rejects the unpleasant. Rather he pays total mindful attention to both and always maintains a balanced mind with regard to both.

All living beings, without any exception, feel. Not very many of them, however, use feeling as a means of gaining deeper insight into the reality of their experience, while avoiding emotional reaction. Human beings who use their mind to think and create are in a very advantageous position. Unfortunately, however, not many human beings use their feelings as a way to develop their humanness or humane qualities. There are many human beings who have not learned to use their unlimited mental capacity and feelings for further development of their mind.

When somebody asks you, "How are you?" You would say "I am fine." or "I have never felt better." or "I am O.K. and how about yourself?" or "I don't feel well today." or "I have a bit of an upset stomach. " or "I feel miserable today." Here you express your feelings but not any particular reason for how you feel. If you were to perform a psychological analysis you would make a distinction between feelings and sensations. In your daily expression, however, you use these two terms indiscriminately. In order to maintain consistency in this article, I, too, therefore, will use the term "feelings" indiscriminately to mean both "feelings" and "sensations". It may be better to put the difference between these two terms on the back burner until you have completely read this article. I am not trying to make any neurological analysis here of how feeling occurs. My attempt is to point out how feelings should be used as an object of mindfulness training so that you would be able to live with all kinds of feelings without having a nervous breakdown.

Feeling should be used as a mechanism for gaining deeper insight into the reality of feelings. We know from the moment we were born until we breathe our last breath we operate on feelings. Feeling arises from the periphery due to designation contact or from the deep down our own state of mind due to impingement contact. As soon as our senses come in contact with their objects we become conscious of our feelings caused by peripheral contact. Initiated simultaneously with the development of our nervous system, feeling was present even as we were in our mother's womb. When our mother ate hot food we felt the heat. When she ate cold food we felt the cold. When she was angry we felt her agitation and tension. When she moved we felt her movements. When she sang we heard her singing. When she cried we heard her cry. When she laughed we heard that too. While we may not be able to recall this, nevertheless, we felt all of them.

As soon as we were born we cried not only because we felt sad that we had to leave our mother's womb, or not only because we thought that if we did not cry that people wouldn't pay attention to us, but because we felt the change of atmosphere. From the warm, dark and comfortable environment in the mother's womb we were thrust into the cool, blinding bright light and uncomfortable surroundings with several people around us. We had never experienced this before. From the moment we started our struggle of life as a unicellular being, we have been experiencing feelings. From the moment our nerve cells or neurons began to develop we have been experiencing our feelings. When the feeling pleases us we wish to have more of it and when feeling does not please us we wish to reject it. This is our natural reaction. Our entire search--struggle, achievements, improvement, development, inventions, working hard or not, desire to live or not to live-- depends on how we feel. Our search for food, clothing, medicine, shelter, sex, heat, cold, and much more, depends on our feelings. When we feel cold we look for heat. When we feel hungry we look for food. When we want to evacuate we go to a suitable place to fulfill that feeling. We have discovered, manufactured, developed or improved many things because of what we feel. We create and procreate according to our feelings. Even our reasoning began from our feelings. All that we do depends on our feelings. Our reaction to any situation depends on how we feel. After reacting to the situation we may rationalize our reaction. All our emotional reactions depend on how we feel about a situation. Repeated emotional reactions to feelings gradually nourish our ego. When emotional reaction becomes a habit we rationalize our emotional reaction and defend ourselves saying, "I have every right to defend my feelings when somebody hurts my feelings."

When we begin to learn the universal nature of feelings we begin to train our minds to use it for the benefit of all living beings, rather than becoming selfish. When we learn to train our minds to use feelings as objects of our mental development, we learn more about it and make the full use of it with deeper understanding. When you universalize your feelings you become more mindful about not saying anything to hurt anybody. Nor can you do anything to destroy any living being. All living beings feel the fear of death. Of course, if you ignore others' feelings, you may justify doing anything. Most of the time your justification does not come with feeling. You rationalize anything if you can ignore others' feelings. Religious fanatics are well known for this. Some people, while putting their own religions on high pedestals, use abusive or disparaging language to attack people belonging to other religions, because they ignore their feelings.

All these are but a few examples of how much you suffer from your own feelings. If you look at your feelings with understanding, you would not be very upset to see somebody different from you. You won't get annoyed if someone speaks a language you don't understand. If you understand the nature of feelings you can listen to somebody's complaints of pain without yourself complaining. If you don't understand feelings you may be very obnoxious, arrogant and insulting, and later suffer for this behavior.

When you train yourself to have mindfulness of feelings your whole attitude will change and you will feel more comfortable in noticing differences in the world. Notice your feeling--pleasant, unpleasant or neutral--focus your total attention on it without thinking or saying, "Ah! My head aches," or "My leg aches," etc. Unless you pay total attention to your feeling, you won't know what is behind it. Pay total attention to your own feeling and begin to notice the pleasant feeling behind your unpleasant feeling. Only by giving total attention to something can you notice what is behind that thing. If you have enough patience to observe your feeling, you will also notice that it is changing. You would not notice this change in feeling if you did not pay attention to it. It is your attention, not the word, that brings things to the surface of your mind.

Suppose you feel depressed. If you pay total attention to this feeling without adding any other emotion to it, you will notice your depression gradually diminishing. Of course, you may make your depression more miserable and even may have manic depression lasting for several days if you become attached to it. Or you can get rid of it very quickly if you learn to accept the reality of change that takes place during every moment of your feeling. Fortunately for you even unpleasant feelings are impermanent.

Suppose you wake up one morning with a terrible headache. Immediately find a reasonably quiet place in your house or apartment and spend some time quietly sitting down, closing your eyes and watching your headache without any presumption or worry, but paying total attention to it. Soon will you notice your headache diminishing slowly. But if you worry about it, you may make your headache worse by adding more tension or pressure to it, because you add another feeling--worry--rather than dealing with just one feeling--headache.

Suppose one night or for several nights in a row you cannot sleep. Following morning you wake up and you feel a little uncomfortable. If you begin to worry about not sleeping you may have more uncomfortable feelings. Now it is this worry, not the sleeplessness that makes you feel greater discomfort. If, on the other hand, you take it easy and don't worry about not having a good night's sleep, you feel better. This means that you can use your feelings to make you feel either comfortable or uncomfortable, depending on how you deal with your feelings.

Suppose one day you feel very peaceful, joyful and happy. Look at that feeling as it is and try to pay total attention to it. As long as you feel peaceful, joyful and happy, try to pay total attention to it and let it fade away when it fades away. Don't try to make it permanent. If that feeling disappears, don't get upset; simply accept the disappearance. Welcome it as it is. By accepting it you allow yourself to recreate it in your mind at another time. If you worry about its disappearance you won't permit it to come back. What you are really doing by accepting the disappearance of your pleasant feeling is learning to relax and be comfortable with the change in your own feelings. You cannot force any feeling to stay with you as you wish. It slips away from your grip. The harder you try to keep it with you the quicker it disappears. If you simply accept it as it comes and let it go as it goes away, you maintain your equilibrium and this permits you to relax.

By the same token, if an unpleasant feeling arises in you, don't try to reject it or push it away prematurely. It takes time for any feeling to go away. You have to cultivate patience with unpleasant feelings as well. If you lose your patience with it, you lose the pleasantness that can follow the unpleasantness, and even magnify it. When you "take it easy", you make things simple and more comfortable for yourself. Simply pay total attention to your unpleasant feeling. You may have certain unpleasant feelings due to a chemical imbalance in your brain. You must admit that whether you like it or not, things in your body and mind change all the time. If you experience certain unpleasant sensations due to a change in hormone balance, you may prolong the imbalance by worrying or by being impatient. If you relax and pay total attention to the hormone imbalance your mind generates better and more positive hormones to transcend the imbalanced state.

Inadvertently, you cultivate a certain mental attitude towards numerous things and persons. This attitude can cause you pleasant or unpleasant feelings. When you mindfully look at your own state of mind, you will see that it is your own attitude that has created that state of mind which results in one feeling or another. Feeling does not come from the object that you perceive but from your own state or mental attitude. This is why when several people look at the same object they can have several different feelings, several different opinions about the object.

If you mindfully watch your own mind and feelings, you can see very clearly and unequivocally that what you feel is your own creation and that you are totally responsible for it. Mindfully watching the continuous change of your own feelings can make you abstain from emotional reactions and make you see the truth of your own feelings. Mindfulness of feelings will not cause you to think obsessive thoughts or abusive thoughts or harmful thoughts. By unmindful thinking you abuse your mind. The abused mind always generates abusive feelings, which always is painful.

The Jhanas by Ajahn Brahmavamso

2007-09-25T02:09:00.000-07:00

INTRODUCTION

In the original Buddhist scriptures, there is only one word for level of meditation. Jhana designates meditation proper, where meditator's mind is stilled from all thought, secluded from all five sense activity and is radiant with other-worldly bliss. Put bluntly, if it isn't Jhana then it isn't true Buddhist meditation! Perhaps this is why the culminating factor of the Buddha's Noble Eightfold the one that deals with right meditation, is nothing less than Jhanas.

·THE BUDDHA'S REDISCOVERY

In the ancient Buddhist texts, the Buddha is said to have discovered Jhana (SN 2,7). This claim is repeated with full explanation by Venerable Ananda in another Sutta (AN 9,42). The fact that the Buddha rediscovered Jhana should not be overlooked, for the rediscovery was a central act in the drama of the Enlightenment.

When it is said that the Buddha discovered Jhana, it is not to be understood that no one had ever experienced Jhana before. For instance, in the era of the previous Buddha Kassapa, countless men and women achieved Jhana and subsequently realized Enlightenment. But in the India of twenty six centuries ago, all knowledge of Jhana had disappeared. This was one reason that there is no mention at all of Jhana in any religious text before the time of the Buddha.

Some might raise an objection that the teachers Alara Kalama and Udaka Ramaputta preached on Jhana, because the texts state that they taught the Bodhisatta (the Buddha-to-be) the attainment of the state of nothingness and the attainment of the state of neither perception nor non-perception. However, those two attainments could not have been connected to Jhana, because the Bodhisatta recalled, just prior to sitting under the Bodhi Tree, that the only time in his life that he had experienced any Jhana was as a young boy, while sitting under a Rose Apple Tree as his father conducted the first-ploughing ceremony (MN 36). That spontaneous early experience of Jhana had been untaught, unplanned and since forgotten. If that was the only Jhana experienced by the Bodhisatta prior to his experience under the Bodhi Tree, then the two teachers Alara Kalama and Udaka Ramaputta could not have taught Jhana at all.

Indeed, in the MAHASACCAKA SUTTA (MN 36), the Bodhisatta is shown as rejecting the experiences under those two teachers as not leading to Enlightenment, and then exhausting just about every form of ascetic practice before concluding that that too did not lead to Enlightenment.

Remembering the early experience of Jhana as a boy, the Bodhisatta thought, "Perhaps this Jhana is the way to Enlightenment (Bodhi)." Thus the Bodhisatta realized the Jhanas under the Bodhi Tree and proceeded from there to Full Enlightenment and the attainment of Buddhahood.

One of the reasons why Jhana was not practiced before the Buddha's Enlightenment was because people then either indulged in seeking pleasure and comfort of the body or else following a religion of tormenting the body. Both were caught up with the body and its five senses and knew no release from the five senses. Neither produced the sustained tranquility of the body necessary as the foundation for Jhana. When the Bodhisatta began the easy 'practices leading to such tranquility of body, his first five disciples abandoned - him in disgust. Such as practice was not regarded as valid. Therefore it was not practiced, and so Jhana never occurred.

After the Buddha's Enlightenment, the very first teaching that he gave, even before the famous Four Noble Truths, was the exposition on the Middle Way, a way which had not existed before (except long ago in the eras of previous Buddhas), a way which leads automatically to Jhana and then to Enlightenment. ,

It was as if, the Buddha said, that He had discovered a long bur lost path leading to an ancient city (SN 12,65). The ancient city was Nibbana (Enlightenment) and the long lost path was the Eightfold Path culminating in Jhana. Since the Buddha rediscovered this path, it can be said that the Buddha rediscovered Jhana.

·CAN ONE BE ATTACHED TO JHANA?

When the Bodhisatta had the insight that Jhana was the way to Enlightenment, he then thought, "Why am I afraid of that pleasure which has nothing to do with the five senses nor with unwholesome things? I will not be afraid of that pleasure {of Jhana)!" (MN 36). Even today, some meditators mistakenly believe that some,.

thing as intensely pleasurable as Jhana cannot be conducive to the end of all suffering. They remain afraid of Jhana. However, in the Suttas the Buddha repeatedly stated that the pleasure of the Jhana "is to be followed, is to be developed and is to be made much o£ It is not to be feared" (MN 66).

In spite of this clear advice from the Buddha Himself, some students of meditation are misled by those who discourage Jhana on the grounds that one can become attached to Jhana and so never become enlightened. It should be pointed out that the Buddha's word for attachment, upadana, only refers to attachment to the comfort and pleasure of the five sense or world or to attachment to various forms of wrong view (such as a view of self). It never means attachment to wholesome things, like Jhana*.

Simply put, Jhana states are stages of letting go. One cannot be attached to letting go. Just as one cannot be imprisoned by freedom. One can indulge in Jhana, in the bliss of letting go, and this is what some people are misled into fearing. But in the PASADIKA SUTTA (DN 29,25), the Buddha said that one who indulges in the pleasures of Jhana may expect only one of four consequences: Stream, Winning, Once-returner, Non-returner, or Full Enlightenment! In other words, indulging in Jhana leads only to the four stages of Enlightenment. Thus, in the words of the Buddha "One should not fear Jhana" (MN 66).

* See upadana in BUDDHIST DICTIONARY: Manual of Buddhist Terms and Doctrines, Venerable Nyantiloka (Fourth Revised Edition), Kandy, Buddhist Publication Society, 1980.

·FOR THOSE A LONG WAY FROM JHANA

For some meditators, the Jhanas may seem to be such a long distance away that they are seen as irrelevant. This is not so. Discussing such sublime states can create inspiration, as well as map out the territory ahead so that one can know the right direction. More crucially, it gives one the information about what to do when one gets close to any of these profound states of freedom. Finally, it gives a deeper understanding of the Dhamma, especially into the Third Noble Truth that is the cessation of all suffering-Nibbana. This is because the rapture and bliss of Jhana is directly related to the amount of Samsara which is, albeit temporary, let go of. Thus, discussing the Jhanas is well worthwhile, even if they may seem so far away form you.

·FOR THOSE A LITTLE CLOSER TO JHANA

Some readers may have already gotten close enough to be able to understand this discussion from their own experience, and it may help them make the last leap into the Jhanas. Furthermore, when a meditator has actually experienced a profound state of meditation, they want to find out exactly what it was, to recognize the state in terms of the Buddha's accurate descriptions. So it is important to be able to correctly identify the levels of depth in meditation.

It is also important to generate some inspiration in one's achievement. Such a positive emotion will only encourage further letting go. It is my aspiration to show you how wonderful and profound these states of Jhana are, and to illustrate how crucial their experience is to the event of Enlightenment.

Eventually, the seeds that are planted in you through reading' a discussion on Jhana like this will one day bear fruit. When one realizes how the mental factor of intention actually occurs, one understands how important it is to get information and inspiration like this on the Jhanas from outside of oneself. Then at the right time, the mind will know automatically what it must do.

For example, when Nimittas arise the mind will spontaneously know how to respond. Sometimes you might reflect on this later, "Where did that intention come from?" The answer is that that movement of the mind came. from reading discussions such as this: Sometimes it comes from things learned in a past life!

These are the things that generate the subtle guidance of the mind in the still states of meditation. They do not come from you. If you get involved and try to do something, the meditation is disturbed and the peace falls apart.

So please do not think that just because you are not at this stage yet, that this discussion is of no use to you. In fact, it will be very useful to you. But you will only realize its usefulness after you have achieved one of the Jhanas and reflect back to see that such instruction as given here, which you thought were forgotten, manifested at the right time to lead the mind into Jhana.

THE BEAUTIFUL BREATH

THE BEGINNING OF THE JOURNEY INTO JHANAS

So far I have discovered the Jhanas from a historical and theoretical point of view. Now it is time to explain the Jhanas in terms of their practice. It is best to begin the description of the journey into Jhana from the starting point of the "beautiful breath." Before this stage is accomplished, the mind has insufficient contentment, awareness and stability to launch itself into the higher states of consciousness. But when one is able to maintain an effortless awareness on the breath without break for a long periods of time, when the mind has settled into such a rich awareness that the breath appears delightful, then one is ready to set off on the journey into Jhana.

·DO NOT BE AFRAID OF DELIGHT

I want to stress that one should be cautious not to be afraid of delight in meditation. Too many meditators dismiss happiness thinking it unimportant- or, even worse, thinking that they don't deserve such delight. Happiness in meditation is important! Moreover, you deserve this bliss out! Blissing out on the breath is an essential part of the path. So when delight does arise alongside the breath, one should cherish it like a valuable treasure, and guard it accordingly.

·THE BEAUTIFUL BREATH AND NO EFFORT

The delight that arises at the stage of the beautiful breath is the "glue" that holds the mind's attention on to the breath. It results in the mindfulness staying with the breath without effort. One stays with full attention on the breath because the mind wants to stay with the breath. The mind, at this stage, enjoys watching the breath so much that it doesn't want to go anywhere else. It just remains with the breath, automatically. It is so content being with the delightful, beautiful breath that all wandering ceases. One remains fully aware of the breath without any need to control the mind. Mindfulness of the breath, here, becomes effortless.

Without the experience of delight, there will be some discontent. And discontent is the source of the wandering mind. Before one reaches the stage of the beautiful breath, discontent pushes mindfulness away from the breath. There, the only way to keep mindfulness upon the breath is through an effort of will, through control. But when the stage of the beautiful breath is achieved, when delight generates long lasting contentment, then the mind will not wander. Then control can be relaxed, effort relieved, and the mind remains motionless, naturally.

Just as petrol/gas is the fuel moving the car, so discontent is the fuel that moves the mind. When a car runs out of gas, it gently comes to a stop. One doesn't need to use the brakes. It comes to a state of stillness, naturally. In the same way, when the mind runs out of discontent, through the arising of the beautiful breath, it gently comes to a stop. One doesn't need to use the brake of will power. The mind comes to a state of stillness, naturally.

. PITISUKHA - JOY AND HAPPINESS

In Pali, the compound word Pitisukha means the combination of joy with happiness. One can use those words for all sorts of experiences, even for worldly experiences. But in meditation, Pitisukha refers only to that joy and happiness that is generated through letting go.

Just as various types of fire may be distinguished by their fuel-such as a wood fire, oil fire or bushfire-so the various types of happiness can be distinguished by their cause. The joy and happiness that arises with the beautiful breath is fueled by the letting go of burdens such as past and future, internal commentary and diversity of consciousness. Because it is a delight born of letting go, it cannot produce attachment. One cannot be attached and letting go at the same time. The delight that arises with the beautiful breath is, in fact, a clear sign that some detachment has taken place.

·THREE MAJOR TYPES OF PITISUKHA

One might propose three major types of pitisukha, (joy and happiness): that generated by sensual excitement, that caused by personal achievement, and that born of letting go. Not only are these types of happiness differentiated by their cause, but they are also very different in their natures. The happiness generated by sensual excitement is hot and stimulating but also agitating and consequently tiring. It lessens in intensity on repetition. The happiness caused by personal achievement is warm and fulfilling but also fades quickly, leaving a sense of a vacant hole in need of filling. But the happiness born of letting go is cool and very long lasting. It is associated with the sense of real freedom.

Moreover, the happiness generated by sensual excitement produces ever-stronger desire, like an addict needing an ever stronger dose, making the happiness unstable and tyrannical. The happiness caused by personal achievement produces more investment in being the control freak, encouraging the illusion of personal power. The controller then kills any happiness. The happiness born of letting go inspires more letting go and less interference. Because it encourages one to leave things alone, it is the most stable and effortlessly long lasting. It is the most independent of causes. It is closest to the unconditioned, the uncaused.

It is important for success in meditation to recognize these different types of happiness. -If the happiness that arises with awareness of the breath is of the sensual excitement type, for example like waves of physical pleasure coursing through your body, then it will soon disappear when effort is relaxed, leaving one heavy and tired. It is of lit de use here. If the happiness is associated with the sense of achievement, for instance thinking "Wow! At last I'm getting somewhere in my meditation," then it will often be followed by the achievement disintegrating, destroyed by the controller suddenly being aroused, ruined by the interfering ego. But if the happiness that arises with the beautiful breath is that born of letting go, then one feels that one doesn't need to say anything, or do anything. It becomes the happiness whose brother is freedom and whose sister is peace. It will grow all by itself in magnificent intensity, blossoming like a flower in the garden of Jhana.

·BEAUTIFUL BREATH,BEAUTIFUL METTA,BEAUTIFUL SKULL!

There are many other objects of meditation as well as the breath. One can take loving kindness (Metta), parts of the body (Kayagatasati), simple visualizations (Kasina) and other things as the focus of one's mindfulness. However, in all meditation that develops into Jhana, there must come a stage where the pitisukha born of letting go arises. For example, loving kindness meditation opens into being such a wonderful, gorgeous, unconditional love fur the whole cosmos, filling the meditator with delicious joy.

Pitisukha born of letting go has arisen and one is at the stage of "beautiful Metta." Another example: some meditators focus on parts of the human body, often on a skull. As the meditation deepens, as mindfulness rests on the inner image of a skull, an amazing process unfolds. The image of the skull in one's mind starts to whiten, then deepen in colour, until it appears to glow with intense luminosity as the "beautiful skull!" Again, Pitisukha born of letting go has appeared filling the whole experience with joy and happiness. Even some monks who practice Asubha (loathsomeness) meditation, on a decaying corpse say, can experience the initially repugnant cadaver suddenly changing into one of the most beautiful images of all. Letting go has aroused so much happiness that it overwhelms the natural disgust and floods the image .with Pitisukha. One has realized the stage of the "beautiful corpse!"

In breath meditation (Anapanasati), the Lord Buddha taught the arousing of Pitisukha along with the experience of one's breath as the 5th and 6th steps of the 16 step Anapanasati method (see MN 118). It is such a crucial stage in meditation that I have dealt with it in THE BASIC METHOD OF MEDITATION*.

* THE BASIC METHOD OF MEDITATION by Ajahn Brahmavamso, available from the Buddhist Society of Western Australia.

·WHAT IF PITlSUKHA HASN'T APPEARED?

When Pitisukha doesn't arise, it must be because there is not enough contentment, this is, one is still trying too much. One should reflect on the first two of the five hindrances. The first hindrance, sensory desire, draws the attention towards the object of desire and thus away from the breath. The second hindrance, ill will, finds fault with the experience of breath, and the dissatisfaction repels the attention away from the breath. Contentment is the "middle way" between desire and ill will. It keeps one's mindfulness with the breath long enough for the Pitisukha to arise.

Sometimes meditators wonder about the role of effort in meditation. At the stage of meditation just before the beautiful breath, one's effort should directed only into the knowing, and kept away from the doing mind. When effort is channeled into doing the meditation, that is, controlling everything, then the energized U doer" moves into restlessness, another of the hindrances. But when the effort is removed from the" doer" and is given fully to the knowing, then not only does restlessness disappear, but so does sloth and torpor. Sloth and torpor is another of the Five Hindrances. It arises because the knowing is without energy. Often this is because all one's energy has gone into doing, into the active function of the mind, into controlling. So much so that the knowing, the passive function of mind, is starved into the feebleness of sloth and torpor. But when all one's effort is invested in the knowing, into mindfulness, then sloth and torpor become replaced by bright and energized knowing.

Putting all one's effort into the knowing is another way of generating pitisukha along with the breath. For the energy of the mind is equivalent to happiness. So if pitisukha hasn't appeared yet, it might be that one is not directing effort away from the doer and into the knowing.

·THE WAY INTO SILENCE

Stillness means lack of movement. What causes the mind to move? "Will" causes the mind to move! This is why if one wants to experience stillness, then one must remove all will, all doing, all control.

One can firmly hold a leaf on a plant but, however hard you try, you will never be able to hold it still. There will always be some

vibration caused by slight tremors in one's muscles. However, if one protected the leaf from any wind, then the leaf becomes still, eventually, all by itself. By removing the causes of the movement, the wind, then the leaf comes to a natural state of stillness.

In exactly the same way, one cannot achieve stillness by holding the mind in the grip of one's will. But if one removes the cause of movement in the mind, the will, then the mind soon comes to a natural state of stillness.

Thus one cannot will the mind to be still! The way into stillness is though the pitisukha born of letting go. Once the delight that comes with the beautiful breath appears, then will becomes redundant. It becomes unnecessary since mindfulness stays with the breath all by itself, effortlessly. Mindfulness enjoys being with the beautiful breath, and so does not need to be forced. It is through the arising pitisukha at the stage of the beautiful breath that will becomes calmed, effort is relieved, and stillness begins to manifest.

When stillness appears it enriches the pitisukha. The deepening of pitisukha, in turn, creates even less opportunity for effort, and so stillness grows stronger. A self- reinforcing, feedback process ensues. Stillness deepens pitisukha. Pitisukha increases the stillness. This process continues, when not interrupted, all the way into Jhana where stillness is profound and pitisukha ecstatic.

.WHEN THE BREATH DISAPPEARS

If the breath disappears before the stage of the beautiful breath, then this is a case of sloth and torpor, of weak attention. One should go back to basics, strengthen present moment awareness and silence, and put more energy into awareness.

But when one is on the stage of the beautiful breath, when it feels so delightful and effortless to be mindful of the breath for long periods of time, then as the mind grows in stillness, the perception of the breath grows more subtle. Soon one is not aware of an in breath, or of a beginning or middle or end of a breath. One is simply aware of a seemingly unchanging perception of breath, a single experience that hardly alters from moment to moment. What is happening is that some of the external features of breath, such as in and out, beginning and end, have been transcended, All one sees is the heart of the breath experience, beyond these labels.

Because of the extreme simplicity of the meditation object, the breath, stillness and pitisukha can grow even stronger. Let them grow stronger. Don't fall onto the trap of doubt, wondering whether this very subtle bare breath experience is what one should be watching. Don't worry that perceptions of in and out, beginning and end, have disappeared. This is how it should be. Don't disturb the process. As the stillness and pitisukha grow ever stronger, the breath disappears.

When in the stage of the beautiful breath, the breath disappears, only the beauty remains. One is aware not of nothingness, but of beauty, the pitisukha without any perception of breath. This is another important stage in one's meditation. It is a step closer to Jhana.

.THE CALMING OF THE SENSES

Buddhism has always described experience in terms of six, not five, senses. They are sight, hearing, smell, taste, touch and also the mind. In breath meditation, one calms the first four senses into disappearance by focusing only on the breath. The breath is then experienced through the senses of touch and mind.

As the meditation progresses, the sense of touch is gradually calmed and the sense of mind becomes more dominant. In the stages of the beautiful breath, the breath is experienced only partly by the sense of touch and mostly by the mind sense. The sense of touch gives one the perception of breath. The mind sense gives one the perception of beauty. When the "breath" disappears, it means that one has succeeded in calming the sense of touch into disappearance. The external five senses have at last been transcended. Only the mind sense remains. And the mind sense experiences the breath as beauty.

In fact, one is still breathing at this stage, albeit ever so softly, It is just that one is now experiencing the breath through the mind sense, and not through the sense of touch. Because the familiar experience of breath is no longer present, one might conclude that one's breath has stopped! But it hasn't. Don't worry. One will not die at this stage of meditation! One is just experiencing the breath in a new and wonderful way. One is experiencing the breath only through the mind sense, and perceiving it as bliss.

It is like viewing a rare, sparkling diamond. At first one is aware of the shape, size and its many facets. But, maybe, after a while one doesn't perceive the size and shape any more. Even the concept of facets disappears. All one notices, all that one is left . with, is the "sparkle," the beauty. The diamond is still there only one perceives it in a new and wonderful way.

Or it is like the simile that I like to use of the Cheshire Cat in ALICE IN WONDERLAND, by Lewis Carrol. First, the smiling face of a Cheshire Cat appears in the blue sky. As Alice and the Red Queen observe the image, the Cat's head gradually disappears. Soon, only a mouth is left with an endearing smile. Then the mouth disappears, but the smile still remains! The body has gone, but the beauty remains.

This is how it appears when the five external senses completely disappear and only the mind sense remains. When one is not used m pure mental objects, with no link to anything in the physical world, then one may easily become confused. Faith or confidence (Saddha) is helpful here. If wisdom born of experience is yet too weak, then use confidence to know that when, in the stage of the beautiful breath, the breath disappears leaving only a feeling of beauty or delight, then that is a pure mental object that one is experiencing. Stay there with confidence. Be careful not to allow the hindrance of doubt to disturb the delightful peace. One may figure out what the experience means at the end of the meditation period, not now. As mentioned many times already, one should wait to the final few minutes of the meditation period to review any meaningful experiences.

. SUMMARY of Part One

This chapter has been an introduction to the Jhanas. I have given a brief history of the Jhanas and have explored some of the issues often raised about this exalted topic. I have returned yet one more time to the "beautiful breath," for it is the beginning of the journey into Jhanas. I have prefaced the beautiful breath with the important exhortation not to be afraid of delight in meditation, for delight is the "glue" that holds the mind's attention on the breath.

The next part takes us further down the road to the deep absorptions. Let us turn now to a discussion of the Nimitta, the "home stretch" into Jhanas.

THE NIMITTA

THE "HOME STRETCH" INTO JHANAS

When the breath disappears and delight fills the mind, the nimitta usually appears.

Nimitta, in the context used here, refers to the beautiful "lights" that appear in the mind. I would point out, though, that the nimittas are not visual objects, in that they are not seen through the sense of sight. At this stage of the meditation, the sense of sight is not operating. The nimittas are pure mental objects, known by the mind sense. However, they are commonly perceived as lights.

What is happening here is that perception struggles to interpret such a pure mental phenomenon. Perception is that function of mind that interprets experience in terms one can understand. Perception relies crucially on comparison, interpreting experience as in the same category as some similar previous experience. However, pure mental. phenomena are so rarely visited that perception has great difficulty finding anything at all comparable to these new experiences. This is why nimittas appear strange, like nothing one has ever experienced before. However, the phenomena in the catalogue of one's past experitinces which usually come closest to these nimitta are simple visual lights, such as a car headlight or a flashlight in the dark or the full moon in the night sky. So perception adopts this closest, but imperfect, comparison and interprets the nimitta as lights. Thus, one usually experiences nimitta as a light, a light seen in the mind.

It was a fascinating discovery to realize that everyone who experiences these nimittas, experience exactly the same thing! It is only that meditators interpret one and the same experience in different ways. Some see in their mind the nimitta as a pure white light, others see it as a golden, some as a deep blue. Some see it as a circle, some as oblong in shape, some as sharp edged, and some as fuzzy edged. There is indeed no end to the features of nimitta, which meditators describe. The important thing to know is that color, shape and so on are irrelevant. Because it is one's perception that colors the nimitta and gives it shape, just so one can make sense of it.

·WHEN NIMITTA COME UP EARLY

Sometimes, a "light" can appear in the mind at a very early stage of the meditation. However, for all except accomplished meditators, one will find that such "brazen intruders" are highly unstable. If one focuses one's attention on them, one will not get anywhere. It is not the right time for nimitta. It is better to regard them as distractions and go back to the main task of the early stage.

Ignore the Nimitta at First. It is more uncertain what to do when a nimitta appears at the stage of the beautiful breath, when the breath has yet to be calmed to disappearance. Again, the nimitta appears intrusive, It interferes with the main task of sustaining one's awareness on the beautiful breath. If one deliberately turns away from the breath and on to the nimitta, it usually doesn't remain long. The mind is not refined enough yet to hold a subtle nimitta; One needs to practice on the breath more. So the best thing to do is to ignore the nimitta and let all one's attention train on the beautiful breath.

Often having followed this advice, the nimitta comes back, stronger and brighter. Ignore it again. When it returns a third time, even more powerful and radiant, go back to the breath. Practicing this way, eventually a hugely powerful and brilliant nimitta will break into your awareness. You can go with that one. Actually, it is almost impossible to ignore. That one usually takes you into Jhana.

The above can be compared to a visitor knocking on your door. It could be an unimportant salesman so you ignore them and go on with your business. Often that's the end of the matter. Sometimes, though, they knock again, louder and longer. You ignore them a second time and continue with your task. They bang ever louder, ever more vigorously. This proves that it must be your best friend, so then you open the door, let them in, and have a great time together.

Incorporate the Nimitta into the Middle of the Breath. Another method of dealing with an early nimitta that arises at the stage of the beautiful breath is to incorporate the nimitta into the middle of the breath. One trains to visualize the situation as similar to a jewel being held in the center of lotus petals. The shimmering jewel is the nimitta, the lotus petals the beautiful breath. If the mind isn't quite ready to stay with the nimitta, it still has the breath to anchor it.

Sometimes, the mind is so unready that the breath appears to close in on the nimitta, and the nimitta disappears leaving only the beautiful breath. But this step backward does not disturb the meditation. At other times, the mind is well prepared for the nimitta, and the nimitta strengthens and expands pushing out the breath, which disappears beyond the edges of one's awareness, leaving only the nimitta. This method is skillful because it doesn't involve moving the mind from one thing to another. Such movement is coarse and disturbs the meditation significantly. Instead, one just passively observes the transition from the beautiful breath to the nimitta, and maybe back again, allowing the process to develop or recede according to nature, not according to one's desire.

For Accomplished Meditators Only. Although the following advice is for accomplished meditators only, by which I mean those with plentiful experience of Jhana already, it is included here for the sake of completeness. When one is skillful in the way into Jhana and one has experienced a Jhana recently, the mind is so still and powerful even before one begins to meditate that one may skip many stages. So much so that one may arouse the nimitta almost immediately after starting. The mind being so used to nimitta, and so favorably disposed to towards them, literally leaps into the nimitta and the nimitta stays. Soon Jhana is reached. For such accomplished meditators, the earlier the nimitta arises, the better.

·WHEN THE NIMITTA DOESN'T APPEAR

For some, when the breath disappears, the nimitta doesn't happen. No lights appear in their mind. Instead, they are only left with a deep feeling of peace, of emptiness, of nothing. This can be a very beneficial state and should not be belittled, but it is not Jhana. Moreover, it lacks the power to proceed any further. It is a cul-de- sac, and a refined one at that, but it is incapable of being developed further. There are a number of methods to bypass this state, generate the causes for nimitta, and go deeper into the Jhanas.

Cultivate Sufficient Joy and Happiness (Pitisukha). The state above arises because one did not cultivate sufficient Pitisukha along with the breath. There was not enough delight when the breath disappeared, so mindfulness had no clear mental object of beauty to latch on to. Understanding this, one needs to put more value on developing delight when one is watching the breath, and cultivating that delight into a strong sense of beauty. For example, one may regard the breath as the messenger bringing you oxygen as a life supporting gift from the flowers and trees. The breath unites you vitally with all of the plant world, supporting one another with the pulse of the air. Whatever skillful means one employs, by paying careful attention to the beauty alongside the breath, the beauty will blossom. What one pays attention to usually grows.

In tThe previous chapter, one was cautioned not to be afraid of delight in meditation. I regard this exhortation as so important that I am going to repeat it again almost word for word.

Do not be afraid of delight in meditation. Too many meditators dismiss happiness thinking it unimportant or, even worse, thinking that they don't deserve such delight. Happiness in meditation is important! Moreover, you deserve to bliss out! Blissing out on the meditation object is an essential part of the path. So when delight does arise alongside the breath, one should cherish it like a valuable treasure, and guard it accordingly.

Putting Energy into Knowing. Another reason for the nimitta not arising is that one hasn't put enough energy into the knowing. As explained in the previous chapter, in the section entitled "What If Pitisukha Hasn't Appeared" (page 15), delight is generated by putting lots of energy into the knowing.

Usually, most of our mental energy gets lost in the doing, that is, in planning and remembering, controlling and thinking. If one would only take away one's energy completely from the doing, and give it all totally to the knowing, to attentiveness, then one would experience one's mind becoming brightened and energized with delight. When there is lots of delight, strong pitisukha, then when the breath disappears, the nimitta appears. So, maybe the reason why a nimitta doesn't appear is that one wasted too much energy on controlling, and didn't devote enough energy into knowing.

Watching Out for Discontent. However, if the breath has disappeared but no nimitta arises, then one must be careful not to fall into discontent. Discontent will wither any pitisukha already there and will urge the mind into restlessness. This discontent will make the arising of a nimitta even more unlikely. So one must be patient and seek the remedy in becoming aware of contentment and letting it consolidate. Just through paying attention to contentment, it usually deepens. As contentment grows stronger, delight will arise. As delight grows in power, the nimitta appears.

Focus More Sharply in the Present Moment. Another useful method to arouse the nimitta when the breath disappears is to focus more sharply on the present moment! Present moment awareness is the very first stage of this method of meditation. But, in practice, as the meditation progresses and one pays attention to other things, the present moment awareness can become a little sloppy. It may be that one's mindfulness has become "smeared" around the present moment, instead of being precisely focused. By noticing this as a problem, it is very easy to adjust the focusing of mindfulness to be knife-edged in the center of now. Like adjusting the camera, the slightly blurred image becomes very sharp. When the attention is sharply focused in the present moment, it experiences more power. Pitisukha comes with the sharpening of focus, and the nimitta soon follows as well.

.SUITABLE NIMITTA AND USELESS NIMITTA

It is very helpful to cultivate nimitta of the sort perceived as a light. These "light nimittas" are the best vehicle for transporting the meditator into the Jhanas. However, it is just possible, but rarely done, to enter a Jhana by using "feeling nimittas" instead. By this I mean that one sees no lights in the mind, instead one experiences a feeling of bliss in the mind. It is important to note that the sense of touch has been transcended and such a "feeling" of bliss is experienced completely by the mind sense. It is a pure mental object again, but perceived as relating closely to a physical feeling of bliss. This is a bona-fide nimitta. But it is much more difficult to work with such as a nimitta to gain access to Jhana, though it is not impossible. For these reasons, it is recommended to cultivate the light nimitta if one aspires for the Jhana.

There are some visual nimittas that are of no use on the path into Jhana. It is helpful to know these "useless" nimitta so that one will waste no time with them.

Visions. Sometimes whole scenes can appear clearly in the mind. There might be landscapes, buildings and people. They may appear familiar or strange. It might be fascinating to watch such visions, but they are of little use. Moreover, they are meaningless and one should certainly not take them as some revelation of truth! Experience shows that visions arising at this stage are notoriously deceptive and completely untrustworthy. If one likes to waste time, one can linger on them a while. But the recommended thing to do is to remove all interest and go back to the beautiful breath. Such complex nimitta are merely a reflection of an overcomplicated mind. The mind should have been calmed into simplicity much more effectively before letting go of the breath. When one sustains the attention on the beautiful breath, uninterrupted for long periods of time, then one is training in simplicity. Then when the breath disappears, a simple unified nimitta arises, one that is suitable for progress.

The Firework Nimitta. A less elaborate nimitta, which is still overcomplicated, can be called the "firework nimitta." As the name suggests, this consists of many bursts of light coming and going, never lasting long and exhibiting much movement. There may be several bursts of light at the same time, even of different colors. Again, this firework nimitta is a sign that the mind is still too complicated and very unstable. If one wants, one can enjoy the sideshow for a short time, but one should not waste too much time there. One should ignore all the razzele-dazzele of the firework nimitta, return to the breath, and develop more one-pointedness and calm.

The Shy Nimitta. The next type of nimitta can be called the "shy nimitta," a single pure light that flashes up quickly and then disappears. After a few moments, it flashes up again. Each time, it lasts only a second or two. Such a nimitta is much more encouraging. Its simplicity shows that the mind is one-pointed. Its power is a sign that pitisukha is strong. But its inability to remain after breaking through into consciousness shows that the level of calm is not quite enough. In such a situation, one need not return to the beautiful breath yet. Instead, one patiently waits, developing more calm, allowing the mind to become more receptive to the very shy nimitta. As will be explained at greater length later, this nimitta disappears because the mind overreacts to its arrival, usually with excitement or fear. By establishing more solid calm and having the confidence to not react at all, the shy nimitta returns and stays longer each time. Soon, such a nimitta loses its shyness and, feeling accepted within the mind's calmness, remains a long time. One should attempt this approach first; But if the nimitta continues being "shy," with no indication that it is remaining longer, then one should return to the beautiful breath and ignore the shy nimitta. When one has built more tranquility of mind with the beautiful breath, then one can return to the shy nimitta to see of it will establish itself this time.

The Point Nimitta. Another type of nimitta is the "point nimitta," a simple and powerful light, but ever so small, which persists many seconds. This nimitta can be very useful. It shows that one-pointedness is excellent, calm is sufficient, but pitisukha is still a bit lacking. However, all one needs to. do is gently look deeper into the point nimitta, letting mindfulness zero in, then it appears as it one's awareness comes closer to this nimitta and its size starts to increase. As it expands a little, one should keep one's focus on the center, not on the edges, nor beyond the edges. By maintaining the mind's focus sharply on the center of the point nimitta, it increases power, it grows in pitisukha. Soon the nimitta unfolds into the best nimitta of all.

The Best Nimitta. The best nimitta of all, that which is the most suitable for Jhanas, begins as being similar to the full moon at midnight in a sky free of clouds. It rises unhurried when the beautiful breath softly disappears. It takes three of four of four seconds to establish its presence and settle down, remaining still and very beautiful before the mind's eye. As it remains without remains without effort it grows brighter, more luminous. Soon it appears brighter than the sun at midday, radiating bliss. It becomes, by far, the most beautiful thing one has ever seen. Its beauty and power will often feel more than one can bear. One wonders whether one can take so much bliss of such extreme power. But one can. There's no limit to the bliss one can feel. The nimitta explodes, drowning one in even more bliss, or one dives into the center of the radiating ecstasy. If one remains there, it is Jhana.

·SHINING UP THE NIMITTA

It is a far-reaching insight to realize that this nimitta is actually an image of one's mind. Just like one sees an image of one's face when one looks in a mirror, one sees an image of one's mind in the profound stillness of this meditation stage. The nimitta is a reflective image of one's mind.

The Importance of Virtue. So when the nimitta appears dull, or even dirty, it means that one's mind is dull, even dirty! Usually, this is because one has been lacking in virtue recently, possibly angry, or maybe self centered. At this stage of meditation, one is looking directly at one's mind and there is no opportunity for deceit. One always sees the mind as it truly is. So, if one's nimitta appears dull and strained, then one should clean up one's act in daily life. One should undertake moral precepts, speak only kindly, and be selfless in service. This stage of meditation when nimittas appear makes it abundantly clear that virtue is an essential ingredient for success in meditation.

Having taught many meditation retreats over the years, I have noticed that the meditators who have the easiest progress and most sensational results, are those who are joyously generous, whose nature would never allow them to harm another being, who are soft spoken, gentle and very happy. Their beautiful lifestyle gives them a beautiful mind. And their beautiful mind supports their virtuous lifestyle. Then when they reach this stage of the meditation and their mind is revealed in the image of the nimitta, it is so brilliant and pure that it leads them easily to Jhana. It demonstrates that one cannot lead a heedless life and self indulgent lifestyle and have easy success in one's meditation. On the other hand, purifying one's conduct and developing compassion, at the same time prepares the mid for meditation.

The best remedy, then, for shinning up a dull or dirty nimitta, is to purify one's conduct outside the meditation.

Focusing On the Beautiful Center. The above being said, if one's conduct in daily life isn't too outrageous, one can shine up the dirty nimitta in the meditation itself This is achieved by focusing the attention on the center of the nimitta. Most areas of the nimitta may appear dull, but the very center of the nimitta is always the brightest and purest part. It is the soft center of an otherwise stiff and unworkable nimitta. As one focuses on the center, it expands like a balloon to produce a second nimitta, purer and brighter. One looks into the very center of this second nimitta, the spot where it is the brightest of all and that balloons up into a third nimitta even purer, even brighter. Gazing into the center effectively shines up the nimitta. One continues in this way until the nimitta is beautifully brilliant.

When, in life, one has developed a strong faultfinding mind, obsessively picking out what's wrong in this and that, then one will find it almost impossible to pick out the beautiful center of a dull nimitta and focus attention thereon. One has become so conditioned to pick out the blemishes in things that it goes against the grain to ignore all the dull and dirty areas of a nimitta to focus exclusively on the beautiful center. This demonstrates once again how unskillful attitudes in life can stop success in deep meditation. When one develops a more forgiving attitude to life, becoming more embracing of the duality of good and bad-not being a negative obsessive nor a positive excessive but balanced "acceptive" - then not only can one see the beauty in mistakes, but one can also see the beautiful center in a dull and dirty nimitta.

It is essential to have a bright and luminous nimitta to take one through to Jhana. A dull and dirty one is like an old, beat up car that will break down on the journey. The dull nimitta, when not made to shine, usually vanishes after some time. So, if one is unable to shine up the nimitta, then go back to the beautiful breath and build up more energy on that part called the "beautiful!" Generate greater Pitisukha, huge happiness and joy, along with the breath. Then next time the breath disappears and a nimitta arises, it will not be a dull one but something more beautiful and luminous. In effect, one has shined up the nimitta in the stage of the beautiful breath.

·STABILIZING THE NIMITTA

When the nimitta is very bright, it is also very beautiful. It usually appears unearthly in the depth of its beauty and more wonderful than anything one has ever experienced before. Whatever the color of the nimitta, that color is a thousand times richer than anything that can be seen with one's eyes. Such awesome beauty will captivate one's attention, making the nimitta remain. The more beautiful the nimitta, the more likely is the nimitta to become stable and not jump about. Thus one of the best methods to stabilize the nimitta, so that it persists a long time, is to shine the nimitta into brilliance, as just explained above.

However, some brilliant nimittas still don't last long. They burst into the mental field of awareness with strong pitisukha, but they persist not much longer than a glorious shooting star in a clear night sky. These nimittas have power but lack sufficient stability.

In order to stabilize such nimitta, it is important to know that the two enemies that disperse the nimitta are fear and excitement.

Fear. Of the two enemies, fear is more common. These nimittas appear so immense in their sheer power and beauty, that one often becomes very afraid. Fear is a natural response to the recognition of something much more powerful than oneself. Moreover, the experience is so unfamiliar that one's personal security looks seriously threatened. It seems as if one might lose all control. And one will-blissfully so-if one would only let go of the "self" and trust in the nimitta! The one would experience desire and control overwhelmed by supramundane bliss, and, in consequence, much of what one took to be one's self would vanish leaving a real sense of freedom. It is the fear of losing part of one's ego that is the root cause of alarm when a powerful nimitta appears.

Those who have understood something of the Buddha's teaching of Anatta, that there is no self, will have an easier time of transcending this fear and accepting the nimitta. They realize that they have nothing to protect and so can let go of control, trust in the emptiness, and selflessly enjoy the beauty and power. Thus the nimitta settles, Even an intellectual understanding that there is no one in here will help overcome the terror of letting go of the innermost controller. However, those who have no appreciation at all of the truth of no self, may overcome this fear by substituting it with the more powerful perception of bliss, as in the simile of the child and the swimming pool.

When a child, who has just learned to feel confident upright on dry land, sees for the first time a swimming pool of water, they are likely to be scared. The unfamiliar environment threatens their security, and they are deeply concerned how their little bodies can manage on such an unsolid material. They are afraid of losing control. So they put one toe into the water and quickly pull it out. That felt all right. So they place three toes into the water, just a little bit longer. That was okay too. Next they dip a whole foot in. Then a whole leg. As the confidence increases and the swimming pool begins to promise much fun, the anticipation of joy becomes stronger than the fear. The child jumps into the water and. immerse itself fully. Then they have such a great time that even their parents can hardly get them to leave!

Similarly, when fear arises with the powerful nimitta, it is all one can do to just stay there. for an instant. This is like the child dipping one toe in the water, and drawing it out in an instant. One then reflects how that felt. To say it felt wonderful is an understatement! So, next time, one is encouraged by they previous experience to stay longer. This is like putting three toes in the water, then a whole foot. Later, one will find oneself staying even longer with the strong nimitta, like putting the whole leg in the water, and it feels even better. By this gradual method, confidence soon becomes strong and the expectation of joy so dominant, that when the awesome nimitta arises one jumps right in and immerses oneself fully. Moreover, one has such a great time that it is only with great difficulty that anyone can make you come out.

Another skillful means for overcoming fear at this stage, especially when fear is not strong, is to perform a little mental ceremony of handing over trust. It is as if one has been the driver of one's meditation up until now, and now is the moment to hand over the control completely to the nimitta. One may imagine handing over a bunch of keys to the powerful nimitta, like getting a trusted friend to take over driving one's car. With the imaginary gesture of passing the keys, one passes over control. One then lets go of all driving and controlling, and puts full trust in the nimitta. Such a transfer of faith from oneself to the nimitta usually leads to stability of the nimitta and its subsequent deepening.

Indeed, one is placing faith in the knowing and taking it away from the doing. This is the theme underlying the whole of the meditation path. One trains from the very beginning in passive awareness, that is, the ability to be clearly aware without interfering at all with the object of awareness. Energy, with faith, goes into the mindfulness and away from activity. When one learns to watch with ease an ordinary object like the breath without meddling; then one's passive awareness will next be challenged with a more seductive object like the beautiful breath. If one passes this test, then the most challenging object of all, the nimitta, will be presented to you as the ultimate test of passive awareness. For if one gets involved with the nimitta with even the slightest of controlling, then one fails the final examination and gets sent back to the beautiful breath for remedial training. The more one meditates, the more one learns to be powerfully mindful while letting go of all doing. When this skill is fully perfected, it is easy to pass the final test and stabilize the nimitta with flawless passive awareness.

The simile of the mirror is applicable here. When one looks in a mirror at the reflection of one's face and the image moves back and forth, then it is futile to try to stabilize the image by holding the mirror still! In fact, if you try this, the reflection moves even more. The image in the mirror is moving because that which is watching is moving. The mirror doesn't move and so does not need to be held still. The fault is with the knower.

The nimitta is in reality a reflection of the mind, an image of that which is knowing. When this reflection, this nimitta, moves back and forth, then it is futile trying to stabilize the nimitta by holding the nimitta still! In fact, if you try this, the nimitta moves even more. The nimitta is moving because that which is watching the nimitta is moving. When this is understood, one gives up on doing any holding and, instead, focuses on that which knows, letting that come to stillness. Because when that which knows doesn't move, then neither does the nimitta. Like the reflection of one's face in the mirror, when the knower is still, then so is its reflection.

Excitement. I mentioned above that the other enemy of the nimitta's stability is excitement or exhilaration, what I sometimes call the "Wow!" response. It is understandable that when there is success in the meditation and amazing thing happen, then the meditator can get very excited. This is especially so when a wonderful nimitta first appears, more radiant than the sun and more beautiful than the most exquisite of flowers! It is common, then, for the mind to say, "Wow!" Unfortunately, immediately after the "Wow" the nimitta disappears and may be reluctant to return for a very long time, even months. In order to avoid such a calamity, one should bear in mind Ajahn Chah's famous simile of the STILL FOREST POND.

In the late afternoon, forest monks, wandering in the jungle for solitude, would seek out a river or pool. They needed the water to drink, bathe, and maybe wash a few robes. After drinking and washing, they would set up their forest monk's umbrella draped with mosquito netting away from the pool to spend the evening in meditation. Ajahn Chah said that some times he would sit in his mosquito net with his eyes open to watch the jungle animals come to the water at twilight, also to drink and bathe. But the animals would only come out to drink when he was very still. If he moved, they would sense his presence, run back into the jungle and not return for many days. Ajahn Chah knew how to sit very still, so that the jungle animals didn't know that he was there. He would enjoy watching them drinking and playing, sometimes squabbling, and he would delight in the antics of these wild children of nature.

On some occasions, Ajahn Chah would sit extremely still. Then, after the usual jungle animals had finished by the lake, some strange and wonderful animals would cautiously emerge from the undergrowth's darkness. These beings, if they were animals at all, were so beautiful and rare that no one had ever told him about their existence. Or if they had, then he hadn't understood. He didn't know their names. As they came out from the jungle, their ears would scan the whole area and their noses would timidly sniff for any danger. If Ajahn Chah stirred, even slightly, or softly said, "Wow," these beings would pick up his presence instantaneously and flee back into the jungle, not reemerging for months. They' were the shyest of all beings who live in the jungle, and also the most rare and wondrously beautiful. They are hard to describe.

In this accurate simile, the forest pool represents the mind, and the forest monk sitting near its edge stand for the mindfulness. When mindfulness is still, the "animals" like the beautiful breath and pitisukha come out from the "jungle" to "play" by the mind's edge. Mindfulness must remain still and not interfere otherwise the beautiful breath and pitisukha will nervously withdraw back into the jungle, not easily coming out again. But if the knower, mindfulness, remains extremely still, after the beautiful breath and pitisukha have finished their business in the mind, then the beautiful, shy nimitta will cautiously emerge to play in the mind. If the nimitta senses that mindfulness isn't so still, if it hears the knower thinking "Wow," then the bashful nimitta will immediately run back into the jungle, and it will not re-emerge for a very long time. Mindfulness blew the opportunity by moving.

So when the powerful and beautiful nimittas appear, one must remember this simile and watch with the stillness of an Ajahn Chah, sitting absolutely motionless by the remote forest lake. One must restrain all excitement. Then one will watch this strange and wonderful nimitta make merry in the mind for a very long time, until it is ready to take one into Jhana.

·DISTURBING THE STABLE NIMITTA

When the nimitta is stable and radiant, then one is at the entrance to Jhana. One must train to wait patiently here, maintaining the stillness through the lack of any doing, until the causes or conditions are ready for the transition into Jhana. However, at this stage some meditators make the mistake of disturbing the process by "peeking" at the edge of the nimitta.

Once the nimitta is stable and bright, one might become interested in its shape, or size. Is it circular or oblong? Are the edges precise or ill defined? Is it small or is it big? When one looks at the edge, mindfulness loses its one-pointedness. The edge is the place of duality, of inside and outside. And duality is the opposite of one-pointedness. If one looks at the edge, the nimitta will become unstable, and may even disappear. One should keep mindfulness on the very center of the nimitta, away from the edge, until any perception of edge vanishes into the non, duality of one-pointedness. Similarly, if one attempts to expand or contract the nimitta, then one will also be sacrificing the essential one, pointedness. Expansion and contraction involve the perception of size, and that involves awareness of the edge of the nimitta and the space that lies beyond. Again one is falling back into the trap of duality and losing one-pointedness, through this unprofitable expanding and contracting.

So when the nimitta is stable and bright, just be patient. Don't move. One is building up the Jhana factors of pitisukha and one, pointedness. When they are built to sufficient power, they will unfold into Jhana by themselves.

·A NOTE ON THE LUMINOUS (OR RADIANT) MIND

There is an oft-quoted passage from the Suttas that is relevant here, but which is often misunderstood. The passage is from the ANGUTTARA NIKAYA1.

This mind, O monks, is luminous, but it is defiled by adventitious defilements. The uninstructed world_ ling does not understand this as it really is; therefore for him there is no mental development.

This mind, 0 monks, is luminous, and it is freed from adventitious defilements. The instructed noble disciple understands this as it really is; therefore for him there is mental development (AN 1,1-2).

At the stage of the beautiful and stable nimitta, it is the nimitta that is radiant and incredibly luminous. And the nimitta, as already explained, is an image of the mind. When one experiences such a nimitta, one recognizes it as the luminous the luminous (or radiant) mind of the ANGUTTARA passage above. This nimitta is radiant because the mind has been freed of the Five Hindrances Then, one understands that this nimitta-this luminous mind freed of the Five Hindrances-is the doorway into Jhana, and then one truly understands what is meant by "mental development."

1 I am using the translation here from THE NUMERICAL DISCOURSES OF THE BUDDHA: An Anthology of Suttas from the Anguttara Nikaya, translated by Nyanaponika Thera & Bhikkhu Bodhi, Oxford: Altamira Press, 1999, p 36.

·ENTERING JHANA

When the nimitta is radiant and stable, then its energy builds up moment by moment. It is like adding peace upon peace upon peace, until the peace becomes huge! As the peace becomes huge, the pitisukha becomes huge and the nimitta grows in luminosity. If one can maintain the one-pointedness here by keeping one's focus on the very center of the nimitta, the power will reach a critical level. One will feel as if the knower is being drawn into the nimitta, that one is falling into the most glorious bliss. Alternatively, one may feel that the nimitta approaches until it envelops the knower, swallowing one up in cosmic ecstasy. One is entering Jhana.

Yo, yo Jhanas and Snakes and Ladders. It sometimes happens that when an inexperienced meditator falls into the nimitta, they immediately bounce back to where they began. I call this "Yo, yo Jhanas," after the children's toy that goes up and down on the end of a string. It isn't real Jhana, because it doesn't last long enough, but it is so close that I give it this label. It is that enemy "excitement," which I explained above, that caused the mindfulness to bounce right back from Jhana. Such a reaction is quite understandable since the bliss that one experiences when falling into the nimitta is so much more joy than one can ever imagine. If one thought that the best sexual orgasm was something nice, then one now discovers that it is nothing, trivial, compared tot eh bliss of these Jhanas. These Jhanas are powerful, they blow one away, they are real bliss. Even after a Yo, yo Jhana, one often bursts into tears with happiness, crying at the most wonderful experience, by far, of one's whole life. So it is understandable that novice meditators experience the Yo, yo Jhanas first. After all, it takes a lot of training to be able to handle such immensely strong bliss. And it takes a lot of wisdom to let go of excitement when one of the great prizes of spiritual life is theirs for the taking:

For those who are old enough to remember the game snakes and ladders, the simple children's board game played with dice, they will remember the most dangerous square to land on was the square just before the goal. The ninety-ninth square held the head of the longest of snakes. If you landed on the hundredth square you won. But if you landed on the ninety-ninth square, you fell down the snake ending right back at the beginning! A Yo, yo Jhana is like landing on the ninety, ninth square of the game "snakes and ladders." One is so very close to "winning the game" and entering Jhana, but one fell just a little short, landing on the snake-head of excitement, and slid, or rather bounced, right back to the start.

Even so, Yo, yo Jhanas are so close to the real thing that they are not to be sneered at. One experiences incredible bliss, and transports of joy. It makes one as high as a weather balloon, for many hours up high in the sky without a care in the world, and with so much energy that one can hardly sleep. The experience will be the biggest in one's life. It will change you.

Through a little more training and wise reflection on one's experience, one will be able to fall into the nimitta, or be enveloped by it, without bouncing out. The one has entered the amazing world of Jhana.

THE LANDMARKS OF ALL JHANAS

· NO THOUGHT, NO DECISION-MAKING, NO PERCEPTION OF TIME

From the moment of entering a Jhana, one will have no control. One will be unable to give orders as one normally does. The very idea of "what should I do next" cannot even come up. When the "will" that is controlling vanishes away, then the "I will" that fashions one's concept of future also disappears. The concept of time ceases in Jhana. Within a Jhana, one cannot decide what to do next. One cannot even decide when to come out. It is this absolute absence of will and its offspring, time, that give the Jhanas the feature of timeless stability and that lead to Jhana states persisting, sometimes for many blissful hours.

Non_Dual Consciousness. Because of the perfect one,pointedness, because attention is so fixed, one loses the faculty of perspective within Jhana. Comprehension relies on the technique of comparison, relating this to that, here to there, now with then. In Jhana, all that is perceived is non-dualistic bliss, unmoving, compelling, not giving any space for the arising of perspective. It is like that puzzle where one is shown a still photograph of a well-known object but from an unusual angle, and one has to guess what it is. It is very difficult to comprehend such an object when one is unable to turn to over, or move one's head to look at it this way and that. When perspective is removed, so is comprehension. Thus in Jhana, not only is there no sense of time, but also there is no comprehension of what is going on! At the time, one will not even know what Jhana one is in. All one knows is great bliss, unmoving, unchanging, for unknown lengths of time.

Awareness of Bliss that Doesn't Move. Even though there is no comprehension within any Jhana, due to the lack of perspective, one is certainly not on a trance. One's mindfulness is hugely increased to a level of sharpness that is truly incredible. One is immensely aware. Only mindfulness doesn't move. It is frozen. And the stillness of the super, superpower mindfulness, the perfect one-pointedness of awareness, makes the Jhana experience completely different to anything one has known before. This is not unconsciousness. It is non-dual consciousness. All it can know is one thing, and that is timeless bliss that doesn't move.

Afterwards, when one has emerged from Jhana, such con, summate one-pointedness of consciousness falls apart. With the weakening of one-pointedness, perspective reemerges and the mind has the agility to move again. The mind has regained the space needed to compare and comprehend. Ordinary consciousness has returned.

Having just emerged from a Jhana, it is usual practice to look back at what has happened and review the Jhana experience. The Jhanas are such powerful events that they leave an indelible record in one's memory store. In fact, one will never forget them as long as one lives. Thus, they are easy to recall, with perfect retention of detail, after emerging. It is through such reviewing right after the event, that one comprehends the details of what happened in the Jhana, and one knows which of the Jhanas it was. Moreover, the data obtained from reviewing a Jhana forms the basis of insight that is Enlightenment itself.

The Five Senses are Fully Shut Off. Another strange quality that distinguishes Jhana from all other experiences is that within Jhana all the five senses are totally shut down. One cannot see, one cannot hear, one cannot smell, taste nor feel touch. One cannot hear the sound of the birds, nor a person coughing. Even if there were a thunderclap nearby, it wouldn't be heard in a Jhana. If someone tapped one on the shoulder, or picked one up and let one down, in Jhana one cannot know this. The mind in Jhana is so completely cut off from these five senses that they cannot break in.*

* Although sound can disturb the first Jhana, the fact is that when one perceives the sound, one is no longer in Jhana.

A lay disciple once told me how he had "fluked" a deep Jhana while meditating at home. His wife thought he hid died and sent for an ambulance. He was rushed to hospital in a wail of loud sirens. In the emergency room, there was no heartbeat registered on the E.C.G., nor brain activity to be seen by the E.E.G. So the doctor on put defibrillators on his chest to reactivate his heart. Even though he was being bounced up and down on the hospital bed through the force of the electric shocks, he didn't feel a thing! When he emerged from the Jhana in the emergency room, perfectly all right, he had no knowledge of how he had got there, nor of ambulances and sirens, nor of body-jerking defibrillators. All that long time that he was in Jhana, he was fully aware, but only of bliss. This is an example of what is meant by the five senses shutting down within the experience of Jhana.

· SUMMARY OF THE LANDMARKS OF ALL JHANAS

It, is helpful to know, then, that, within a Jhana:

1. There is no possibility of thought;

2. No decision making process is available;

3. There is no perception of time;

4. Consciousness is non-dual, making comprehension inaccessible;

5. Yet one is very, very aware, but only of bliss that doesn't move; and

6. The five senses are fully shut off, and only the sixth sense, mind, is in operation.

These are the features of Jhana. So during a deep meditation, if one wonders whether it is Jhana or not, one can be certain it is not! No such thinking can exist within the stillness of Jhana. These features will only be recognized on emergence from a Jhana, using reviewing mindfulness once the mind can move again.

THE FIRST JHANA

The “Wobble" (Vitakka and Vicara). All Jhanas are states of unmoving bliss, almost. However, in the First Jhana, there is some movement discernible. I call this movement the "wobble" of First Jhana. One is aware of great bliss, so powerful it has subdued completely the part of the ego that wills and does. In Jhana, one is on automatic pilot, as it were, with no sense of being in control. However, the bliss is so delicious that it can generate a small residue of attachment. The mind, not the doer, instinctively grasps at the bliss. Because the bliss of First Jhana is fuelled by letting go, such involuntary grasping weakens the bliss. Seeing the bliss weaken, the mind automatically lets go of its grasping and the bliss increases in power again. The mind then grasps again, then lets go again.

Such subtle involuntary movement gives rise to the wobble of First Jhana.

This process can be perceived in another way. As the bliss weakens because of the involuntary grasping, it seems as if the mindfulness moves a small distance away from the bliss. Then the mindfulness gets pulled back into the bliss as the mind automatically lets go. This back and forth movement close to the bliss, is a second way of describing the same First Jhana wobble.

This wobble is, in fact, the pair of First Jhana factors called vitakka and vicara. Vicara is the involuntary grasping of bliss vitakka is the automatic movement back into bliss. Some commentators explain the pair, vitakka and vicara as “initial thought" and “sustained thought." While in other contexts this pair can refer to thought, in Jhana they certainly mean something else.

It is impossible that such a gross activity as thinking can exist in such a refined state as Jhana. In fact, thinking ceases a long time prior to Jhana. In Jhana, vitakka and vicar a are both sub-verbal and so don't qualify as thought. Vitakka is the sub-verbal movement of the mind back into bliss. Vicara is the sub-verbal movement of mind that holds onto the bliss. Outside of Jhana, such movements of mind will often generate thought, and sometimes even speech. But in Jhana, vitakka and vicara are too subtle to create any thought. All they are capable of doing is moving mindfulness back onto bliss, and holding mindfulness there. This movement is the wobble of the First Jhana, represented as the pair of First Jhana factors vitakka and vicara.

One-pointedness (Ekaggatha). The third factor of Jhana is one-pointedness, ekaggatha. One-pointedness describes the mindfulness that is so sharply focused on a minute area of existence. It is one-pointed in space because it only sees the point source of bliss, together with a small area surrounding the bliss caused by the First Jhana wobble. It is one-pointed in time because it only perceives the present moment, so exclusively and precisely that all notion of time completely disappears. And it is one-pointed in phenomena because it only knows the mental object of pitisukha, and is totally oblivious to the world of the five senses and one's physical body.

Such one-pointedness is space produces the peculiar experience, only found in the Jhana, of non-dual consciousness, as explained in detail in the previous section. Non-dual consciousness describes the Jhanic state where one is fully aware but only of one thing, and from one angle, for timeless periods. Consciousness is so focused on the one thing that the faculty of comprehension is suspended a while. Only after the one-pointedness has dissipated, and one has emerged from the Jhana, will one be able to recognize these features of First Jhana and comprehend them all.

The one-pointedness in time produces the extraordinary stability of the First Jhana, allowing it to last effortlessly for such a long period of time. The concept of time relies on measuring intervals: from past to present or from present to future or from past to future. When all that is perceived within the First Jhana is the precise moment of now, then there is no room for measuring time. All intervals have closed. It is replaced with the perception of timelessness, unmoving.

One-pointedness of phenomena produces the exceptional occurrence of bliss upon bliss, unchanging throughout the duration of the Jhana. This makes the First Jhana such a restful abode. One-pointedness of phenomena accounts for the great stillness in Jhana.

Thus, the one-pointedness of the First Jhana is experienced as non-duality of consciousness, timelessness and effortless stillness.

In academic terms, ekaggatha is a Pali, compound meaning "one-peak-ness." The middle term Agga (Sanskrit: Agra) refers to the peak of a mountain, the summit of an experience, or even the capital of a Country (as in Agra, the old Mogul capital of India). Thus ekaggatha does not mean just "one-any old point-ness," but it refers to a singleness of focus on something soaring and sublime. The single exalted summit that is the focus of ekaggatha in the First Jhana is the supreme bliss of pitisukha.'

Joy-happiness (Pitisukha). Indeed the last two factors of then First Jhana are piti and sukha. Here, I will deal with them together since they are such a close-knit pair. In fact, they only separate out in the Third Jhana, where piti ceases leaving sukha "widowed". Therefore, only after the Third Jhana, can one know from experience what sukha is and what piti was. Here, it is sufficient to explain the pair as one thing.

The last two, factors of First Jhana, called pitisukha, refer to the bliss that is the focus of attention, and which forms the central experience that is the First Jhana. Bliss is the dominant feature of the First Jhana, so much so that it is the first thing that one recognizes when reviewing after the Jhana. Indeed, mystic traditions other than Buddhism have been so overwhelmed by the sheer immensity, egolessness, stillness, ecstasy, ultimateness and pure, out-of-this-worldliness, of the First Jhana, that throughout history they have comprehended the experience, on reviewing, as "Union with God."

However, the Buddha explained that this is but one form of supramundane bliss and there are other forms that are superior! In the Buddhist experience of the Jhanas, one gets to know many levels of supramundane bliss. The First Jhana is the first level. Even though after First Jhana, one cannot conceive of an experience 'more blissful, there is much more!

These different levels of bliss each have a different "taste," a different quality that sets them apart. These different quali, ties of bliss can be explained by the diverse causes of bliss. Just as heat generated by sunlight has a different quality to heat caused by a wood fire, which itself has a different "taste" to heat generated by a furnace, so bliss fuelled by different causes exhibits distinguishing features.

The distinguishing feature of the bliss of First Jhana is that it is fueled by the complete absence of all five-sense activities. When the five senses shut down, including all echoes of the five senses manifesting as thoughts, then one has left the world of the body and material things (Kamaloka) and entered the world of pure mind (Rupaloka). It is as if a huge burden has dropped away. Or, as Ajahn Chah used to describe it, it is like one had been enduring' a tight rope around one's neck for as long as one can remember. So long, in fact, that one had become used to it and no longer recognized the pain. Then somehow the tension was suddenly released and the rope removed. The bliss one would feel would be the result of a huge burden disappearing! In much the same way, the bliss of the First Jhana is caused by the complete fading away of the "tight rope," meaning all that one took to be the world. Such insight into the cause of the bliss of the First Jhana is fundamental to understanding the Buddha's Four Noble Truths about suffering.

· SUMMARY OF THE FIRST JHANA

In summary then, the First Jhana is distinguished by the five factors, here compressed into three:

1 + 2. Vitakka-Vicara: experienced as the "wobble," being the fine, subtle movement in and out of the bliss;

3. Ekaggatha: experienced as non-duality, timelessness and stillness; and

4 + 5. Pitisukha: experienced as a bliss surpassing anything in the material world, and fueled by the complete transcendence of that world to enter the world of pure mind.

THE SECOND JHANA

Subsiding of the “Wobble.” It was explained in the description of the First Jhana that vitakka_vicara is the involuntary grasping of bliss, causing the mindfulness to move away. Vitakka is the automatic movement of the mind back onto bliss.

As the First Jhana deepens, the wobble gets less and the bliss consolidates. One comes to a state where vicara is till holding on to the bliss with the most subtle of grasping, but this is not enough to cause any instability in the bliss. The bliss doesn't decrease as a result of vicara, nor does mindfulness seem to move away from the source. The bliss is so strong that vicara cannot disturb it. Although vicara is still active, there is no longer any vitakka, no movement of mind back onto the source of bliss. The wobble has gone. This is a Jhana state described in the Suttas as without vitakka but with a small measure of vicara (e.g. DN 33.1.10.50, AN 8's.63). It is so much closer to the Second Jhana than the First, that it is usually included within the Second Jhana.

As the bliss strengthens into immutable stability, there is no purpose for vicara to hold on any more. At this point, the mind becomes fully confident enough to let go absolutely. With this final letting go, born of inner confidence in the stability of the bliss, vicara disappears and one enters the Second Jhana 'II proper.

The first feature then of the Second Jhana described in the sutras is A-Vitakka and A-Vicara, meaning without vitakka and vicara. In experience, this means that there is no more wobble in the mind. The second feature is Ajhattam Sampasadanam, meaning "internal confidence." In experience, this describes the full confidence on the stability of the bliss, which is the cause for vicara to cease.

Perfect One-Pointedness of Mind (Cetaso Ekodibbavam). The third feature of the Second Jhana is Cetaso Ekodibbavam, meaning perfect one-pointedness of mind. This absolutely perfect one"pointedness of mind is the salient 'feature in the experience of Second Jhana. When there is no longer any wobble, then the mind is like an unwavering rock, more immovable than a mountain, and harder than a diamond. Such perfection in unyielding stillness is incredible. The mind stays in the bliss without the slightest vibration. This is later recognized as the perfection of the quality called samadhi.

Samadhi is the faculty if sustained attention, and in the, Second Jhana, this attention is sustained on the object without! any movement at all. There is not even the finest oscillation. One is fixed, frozen solid, stuck with "super_glue," unable even to tremble. All stirrings of mind are gone. There is no greater stillness of mind than this. It is called perfect samadhi and it remains as a feature not only of this Second Jhana, but in the higher Jhanas as well.

The Bliss Born of Samadhi (Samcidhijam Pitisukham). It is this perfection of samadhi that gives the bliss of the Second Jhana it unique "flavor." The burden that was present in the First Jhana that has been abandoned in the Second Jhana is the affliction of movement. Everything stands perfectly still in the Second Jhana, even the knower. Such absolute stillness transcends the mental pain born of the mind moving, and it reveals the greater bliss fuelled by pure samadhi. In the Suttas, the bliss of the Second Jhana is called the pitisukha born of samadhi (e.g. ON 9.11). Such bliss is even more pleasurable, hugely so, than the bliss resulting from transcending the world of the five senses! One could not anticipate such bliss. It is of a totally separate order. After experiencing the Second Jhana, having realized two rare "species" of supramundane bliss that are extreme, one begins to wonder what other levels of bliss may lie ahead. One ponders where the end of bliss lies!

The End of All Doing. Another salient feature of the Second Jhana is that within the Jhana all "doing" has totally ceased, even the involuntary "doing" that caused the wobble to appear has completely vanished. The "doer" has died. Only' when one has experience of the Second Jhana can one fully appreciate what is meant by the term "doer". Just as a tadpole can only fully appreciate what is meant by the term "water," when water "dies" during the frog's first experience on dry land. Within the Second Jhana, the "doer" has gone. It is no more. Absolute stillness remains. Moreover, it seems as if something that was so obvious to you as an essential part of one's eternal identity, the doer, has now been deleted from existence. How often does what seem obvious now, latter turns out to be a mirage, a delusion! After the Second Jhana it is possible to uncover the delusion that the self is the doer. One penetrates the illusion of free will, from the data of raw experience. The philosopher who concludes that "to be is to do," could not have known the state of Second Jhana. In the Second Jhana, "being" is (through knowing), but "doing" is not. These Jhanas are weird. They defy normal experience. But they are real, more real than the world. Moreover, the Second Jhana and the above unlock the meaning of non-self, Anatta.

· SUMMARY OF THE SECOND JHANA

Thus the Second Jhana is distinguished by another collection of features:

1 + 2. Avitakka-Avicara, Ajhattam Sampasadanam: experience as the subsiding of the "wobble" from the First Jhana due to internal confidence in the stability of the bliss;

3. Cetaso Ekodibbavam: perfect one-pointedness of mind due to full confidence in the bliss. This is usually experienced as rock-like stillness, the temporary "death" of the "doer," or the perfection of samadhi

4. Samadhijam Pitisukham: being the focus of this Jhana, the supramundane bliss generated by the end of all movement of the mind, and

5. The end of all doing: seen as the first that the "doer" has completely gone.

THE THIRD JHANA

As the stillness of the knowing, samadhi, becomes longer established, then the stillness of the known grows ever more, profound. It is to be remembered that in Jhana, what is known is the image of the mind. Citta, and the mind is the knowing. In other words, the knowing knows an image of itself in the Jhana. First the knowing becomes still, then its image, the known, gradually becomes still.

In the first two Jhanas, this image of the mind is recognized as a bliss that up until now has been called pitisukha. In the Third Jhana, the image of the mind has gone to the next level of stillness, to, a very different kind of bliss, the like of which one hasn't seen before.

Piti has Vanished! Prior to the Third Jhana, all bliss has something in common, as well as differing in its "flavors" due to the distinguishing causes. That something in common was the combination of piti plus sukha. Because they were always together, seemingly as inseparable as Siamese twins, it was not only pointless but even impossible to tell them apart. It was this combination that, up to now, gave all bliss a common quality. Now in the Third Jhana, piti has vanished leaving only sukha, producing a very different species of bliss altogether.

It is only after the experience of the Third Jhana that one can know what sukha is, and by inference what piti was. Piti appears as the more burdensome part of bliss, although the word "burdensome" in the context of the Second Jhana only just seems appropriate. Sukha is the more refined part. In the Third Jhana, the bliss that was known in the Second Jhana separates out leaving only the sukha.

Great Mindfulness, Clear Knowing and Equanimity. As with many Jhanas, the experiences are next to impossible to describe. However, the higher the Jhana, the more profound the experience and he more difficult it becomes to put into words. These states as their language are remote from the world. At a stretch, one may say that the bliss of the Third Jhana, the sukha, has a greater sense of ease, quieter and more serene. In the Suttas, it is accompanied by the features of mindfulness (sati), clear knowing (sampajanna) and equanimity (upekkha), although these qualities are said in the ANUPADA SUTTA (MN 111) to be present in all Jhanas. Perhaps these features are emphasized in the Suttas as qualities of the Third Jhana in order to point out that in these very deep Jhanas, one is exceptionally mindful, very clear in the knowing, and so still that one looks on without moving, which is the root meaning of equanimity (upekkha).

The Same Rock-like Stillness and Absence of a Doer. The Third Jhana retains the perfect samadhi, the rock-like stillness, the absence of a doer, and the inaccessibility from the world of the five senses. However, it is distinguished from the Second Jhana by nature of the bliss, which has soared up to another level and appeared as another species of bliss altogether. So much so that the Suttas describe the Third Jhana as what the Enlightened One describe by "as one who abides in bliss (in the Third Jhana) mindful, just looking on" (e.g. DN 9.12).

· SUMMARY OF THE THIRD JHANA

Thus the Third Jhana has the following features:

1. The bliss has separated, losing the coarse part that was piti;

2. The bliss that remains, sukha, exhibits the qualities of great mindfulness,

clear knowing and the sense of just looking on;

3. The same absolute rock-like stillness and absence of a doer, as in the Second Jhana.

· THE FOURTH JHANA

Sukha has vanished! As the stillness of the knower calms that which is known, the bliss that was the central feature of the first three Jhanas changes again when one enters the Fourth Jhana. Only this time it changes more radically. Sukha completely disappears. It vanishes. What one is left with is an absolute still knower seeing absolute stillness.

The Perfection of Peace. From the perspective of the Fourth Jhana, the bliss of the previous Jhanas is seen as a residual movement of the mental object, and an affliction obscuring something much greater. When the bliss subsides, all that is left is the profound peace that is the hallmark of the Fourth Jhana. Nothing moves in here, nothing glows. Nothing feels happiness or its opposite, discomfort. One feels perfect balance in the very center of the mind. Like being in the center of the cyclone, nothing stirs in the center of the mind's eye. There is a sense of perfection in here, a perfection of stillness and a. perfection of awareness.

The Buddha described, it as the purification of mindfulness, just-looking on (upekkha sati parisuddhim) (e.g. DN 9.13).

The peace of the Fourth Jhana is like no other peace to be found in the world. It can only be known having passed through the experience "of the previous three Jhanas. That passage is the only way of later confirming that ,the unmoving peace that one felt, was indeed that of Fourth Jhana. Furthermore, the state of Fourth Jhana is so very still, that one remains on its plateau for many hours. It seems impossible that one could experience the Fourth Jhana for any less time.

Though piti and sukha have, both ceased in the Fourth Jhana, and' all that is left is the perfection of peace, such an experience is later recognized, on reviewing, as supremely delightful. Although all bliss has vanished, the perfect peace of the Fourth Jhana is seen as the best bliss so far. It is the bliss of no more bliss! And this is not playing with words, trying to sound clever and mystical. This is how it is.

· SUMMARY OF THE FOURTH JHANA

This the Fourth Jhana has the following features:

1. The disappearrance of sukha;

2. An extremely long lasting, and unchanging, perception of the perfection of peace, reached through the lower three Jhanas;

3. The same absolute rock-like stillness, and absence of a doer, as in the Second and Third Jhanas;

4. The complete inaccessibility from the world of the five senses and one's body.

THE BUDDHA'S SIMILE FOR THE FOURTH JHANAS

The Buddha would often describe the experience within the four Jhanas using an evocative simile for each (MN39.15-18, MN 77.25. 28, etc.). Before explaining these similes, it is, helpful to pause to clarify the meaning of a key word used in all the similes, kaya. Kaya has the same range of meanings as the English word "body." Just as "body" can mean things other than the body of a person, such as a "body of evidence" for example, so too the Pali word kaya can mean things other than a physical body, such as a body of mental factors, nama-kaya. (DN 15.20). In the Jhanas, the five senses aren't operating, meaning that there is no experience of a physical body. The body has been transcended. Therefore, when the Buddha states in these four similes "...so that there is no part of his whole kaya un-pervaded (by bliss etc.)," this can be taken to mean "…so that there is no part of his whole mental body of experience un-pervaded (by bliss etc.)" (MN 39.16). This point is too often misunderstood.

The Buddha's simile for the First Jhana was a ball of clay (used as soap) with just the right amount of moisture, neither too dry nor leaking out. The ball of clay stands for the unified mind, wherein mindfulness has been restricted to the very small areas created by the "wobble." The moisture stands for the bliss caused by total seclusion from the world of the fives senses. The moisture pervading the clay ball completely indicates the bliss thoroughly pervading the space and duration of the mental experience. This is later recognized as bliss followed by bliss, and then more bliss, without interruption. The moisture not leaking out describes the bliss always being contained in the space generated by the wobble, never leaking out of this area of mind space into the world of the five senses, as long as the Jhana persists.

The Second Jhana is likened to a lake with no external entry for water, but with a spring within the lake itself replenishing the lake with cool water. The lake represents the mind. The complete absence of any way that water from outside can enter the lake describes the inaccessibility of the mind in the Second Jhana from any influence outside. Not even the doer can enter such a mind. Such hermetic inaccessibility from all external influences is the cause of the rock-like stillness of the Second Jhana. The internal spring supplying the fount of cool water represents ajjhattam sampasadanam, the internal confidence in the bliss of the Second Jhana. This internal confidence causes complete letting go, cooling the mind to stillness and freeing it from all movement. The coolness stands for the bliss itself, born of samadhi or stillness, and which pervades the whole mental experience, unchanging, throughout the duration of the Jhana.

The Third Jhana is described by the metaphor of a lotus flower that thrives immersed in the cool water of a lake. The lotus represents the mind in Third Jhana. Water can cool the petals and leaves of a lotus but can never penetrate the lotus, since all water rolls off a lotus. The coolness stands for sukha, the wetness stands for piti. So like the lotus immersed in water, the mind in the Third Jhana is cooled by sukha but is not penetrated by piti. The mind in the Third Jhana experiences only sukha. In the Third Jhana, the mind continues to experience a rock-like stillness, never moving outside, just as the lotus in the simile always remains immersed within the water. Just as the bliss of the Third Jhana sustains the mind therein, so the cool water, which represents bliss, causes the lotus to thrive. Once again, the unique bliss of the Third Jhana pervades the whole mental experience form beginning to end, just as the cool waters in the simile pervade the lotus with coolness from its roots to its tips.

The Fourth Jhana is likened to a man draped from head to toe in a clean white cloth. The man represents the mind. The clean white cloth represents the perfect purity of both equanimity and mindfulness that is the hallmark of the Fourth Jhana. The mind in the Fourth Jhana is stainless, spotless as a clean cloth, perfectly still and just looking on, purely and simply. Of course, this absolute purity of peacefulness pervades the whole body of the mental experience, from the start to the end just as the white cloth completely covers the man's body, from head to toe.

This is the meaning to the four similes for Jhana, as I understand them.

MOVING FROM JHANA TO JHANA

As I've indicated before, when one is in any Jhana, one cannot make a move. One cannot formulate any decision to proceed from this Jhana to that. One cannot even make a decision to come out. All such control has been abandoned within Jhana. Furthermore, the ultra, stillness of mindfulness in Jhana freezes the activity of mind called comprehension to the extent that, while in Jhana, one can hardly make sense of one's experience. The landmarks of Jhana are only recognized later, after emerging and reviewing. Thus, within any Jhana, not only one cannot move, but also one cannot know where one is nor where to move to! So how does movement from Jhana to Jhana occur?

A Four-Roomed House. Imagine a four-roomed house with only one entrance door. Going through that door, one enters the first room. One must go through the first room to enter the second room, go through the second room to enter the third room, and one must go through the third room to enter the fourth room. Then to go out from the fourth room one must leave via the third room, to go out from the third room one must leave via the second room, to out from the second room one must leave via the first room, and to go out from the first room one must leave by the same door through which one came in. Now suppose that the floor surface in all the four rooms was so slippery that it is impossible to add to the momentum within the house. Thus, if one entered the house with only a little momentum, one will slide to a halt within the first room. With a great amount of entry momentum, one may come to a stop in the second, or even the third room. Then with yet more entry momentum, one may reach the fourth room.

Such a simile well describes how moving from Jhana to Jhana actually occurs. Within a Jhana there is no control, like the very slippery floor inside the house that make adding to the momentum impossible. If one enters the doorway into Jhanas with a little momentum, one stops in the First Jhana. With greater momentum, one reaches the Second or Third Jhana. And, with yet more entry momentum, one may reach the Fourth Jhana. The entry momentum can only be generated outside of Jhana, when control is possible. The type of "momentum" referred to here is the momentum of letting go.

Letting Go is Cultivated Before Entering Jhana. Letting go is cultivated before entering Jhana, to the point where it becomes an involuntary inclination of the mind, a strong natural tendency. If one enters the doorway into the Jhanas with little more than adequate "letting go momentum," one will stop in the First Jhana. With a stronger automatic tendency to let go, one reaches the Second Jhana or Third Jhana. With a very strong inclination to letting go, one attains to the Fourth Jhana. However, one cannot increase the strength of letting go momentum while inside the Jhanas. Whatever one enters with is all that one has.

Reviewing the Experience of Bliss. One can cultivate this momentum of letting go outside of Jhana by reviewing the experiences of bliss and by recognizing the obstacles called attachments. When the mind recognizes how superior is the happiness in states of letting go, the inclination to more letting go grows ever stronger. Sometimes I have taught my stubborn mind by thinking, "See mind! See! See how much more bliss is in the states of letting go! See mind! Don’t forget mind! Remember, okay?" The mind then leans ever more strongly to letting go. Or the mind can recognize the obstacles to deeper bliss, being the various levels of attachment that ill block letting go, and these hinder more bliss. When the mind learns, through reviewing, to recognize the enemies to its own happiness - the attachments - then its inclination to letting go becomes empowered by wisdom. This is how one can cultivate the momentum of letting go outside of Jhana, so that one may enter the Jhana with great letting go and reach the deeper Jhanas.

· EACH JHANA IS WITHIN THE OTHER

.

Another way to look at how one moves from Jhana to Jhana is with the simile of the thousand-petalled lotus. The petals in a thousand-petalled lotus open up in order, in strict succession, only after being warmed by the sun. The First Jhana can be compared to the rare and delicate 993rd row of petals. Just as the 993rd row of petals, now being warmed by the sun, holds and conceals within the even more fragrant 994th row of petals, so the rare and delicate First Jhana now being warmed by letting go, holds and conceals within it the even more blissful Second Jhana. When this 993rd row of petals eventually opens up, then the 994th row of petals appears in its center. In the same way, when First Jhana eventually opens up, then the Second Jhana appears in its 'center. Thus the Second Jhana is actually within the First Jhana, the Third Jhana within the Second Jhana, and the Fourth Jhana within the Third Jhana.

To put it another way, in the simile of the four-roomed house, the rooms are concentric. Thus one does not come out from the First Jhana to go next to the Second Jhana. Instead, one goes deeper into the First Jhana to go into the Second Jhana, deeper into the Second Jhana to get to the Third Jhana, and deeper in to the Third Jhana to enter the Fourth Jhana. The next level of Jhana always lies within the present Jhana.

· THE POWER OF ADITTHANA

When one has had much experience of Jhana, one can move from Jhana to Jhana using the power of Aditthana. In this context, the Pali word Aditthana represents the Buddhist way of programming the mind. At the beginning of one's meditation, one can program the mind to enter a specified Jhana for a pre-determined length of time. Of course, this only works for one who is very familiar with the destination and well acquainted with the route there. This is the method that every accomplished meditators use. It is like setting the automatic pilot shortly after take-off. However, even for such accomplished meditators, the specified Jhana is reached by traversing the same path. For example, if one programs the mind to enter the Third Jhana, then it must pass through the First Jhana and then pass through the Second Jhana to enter the Third Jhana, although it may pass through these lower Jhanas quickly.

THE IMMATERIAL ATTAINMENTS

In the simile of the thousand petalled lotus cited above, the 993rd row of petals represents the First Jhana, the 994th row the Second Jhana, the 995th and 996th rows of petals should represent the Third and Fourth Jhanas. However, you may be wondering what do the 997th, 998th, 999th and 1,000th rows of petals represent?

Beyond the Four Jhanas lies the Four Immaterial Attainments. It is noteworthy that the Buddha never called these attainments Jhana in the Suttas. Only the commentaries, compiled a thousand years later, call them Jhana.

The Four Immaterial Attainments are:

1. The mind-base of un-limited space;

2. The mind-base of un-limited consciousness;

3. The mind-base of nothingness;

4. The mind-base of neither perception nor non-perception.

Just as the Fourth Jhana lies within the Third Jhana, so the First Immaterial Attainment lies within the Fourth Jhana, the Second Immaterial Attainment lies within the First Immaterial attainment and so on like the rows of petals of die lotus. Thus, of necessity, all Four Immaterial Attainments possess the following features carried over from the Jhanas.

1. The mind remains inaccessible to the world of the five senses and all knowledge of the body

2. The mind persists in rock-like stillness, incapable of forming any thought or making any plans,

for long periods of time;

3. Comprehension is so frozen that one can hardly make sense, at the time of one's experience.

Comprehension is achieved after emerging; and

4. The pure equanimity and mindfulness of the Fourth Jhana remains as a foundation for

each Immaterial Attainment.

Just as the first three Jhanas take different forms of bliss as their object, and the Fourth Jhana takes a sublime state of pure peace as its object, so the Immaterial Attainments each take a pure mental object. The perceptions of these objects I call "mind bases," since they are the mental platforms on which the Immaterial III: Attainments rest. These unmoving mind-bases get ever more refined, and empty, the higher the Immaterial Attainment.

Back in the Fourth Jhana, mindfulness is powerful, yet still, just looking on at the perfection of peace - way beyond the world of the five-senses and precisely one-pointed. In states of precise one-pointedness, ordinary concepts derive from the world are squeezed out, and other unworldly perceptions replace them.

For example, when a meditator jn the early stages becomes perfectly focused in the present moment, one-pointed in time, ordinary concepts of time are squeezed out, and other unworldly perceptions of time replace them. When one is fully centered within the present moment, on the one hand it feels timeless and on the other hand it feels as if one has all the time in the world. Within the point of absolute now, time is without edges, undefined and immeasurable. It is infinite and nothing at the same time. It is unlimited (ananta), The experience of one-pointedness in time, seen early in the 'meditation, can be the key to understanding the simultaneous sense of infinity and emptiness in the more profound states of one-pointedness called the Immaterial Attainments.

From the Fourth Jhana, the mind can look into the perfect peace to perceive absolute one-pointedness in space. This is one of the features of the Fourth Jhana always available for inspection, as it were, and it is the doorway into the Immaterial Attainments. In this absolute one-pointedness, space is perceived as both infinite and empty, a sort of no-space. Because it is perceived as empty of that which usually limits space, material form (rupa), this attainment and those following are called Immaterial (arupa) Attainments.

· THE MIND-BASE OF UN-LIMITED SPACE

The First Immaterial Attainment, then, is the mind-base of unlimited space, perceived as both infinite and empty, immeasurable and undefined. This is the perception that fills the mind thoroughly and persists without blinking for the long duration of the attainment. Mindfulness, powerful, still and purified, looks on at this perception with utter contentment.

· THE MIND-BASE OF UN-LIMITED CONSCIOUSNESS

Within the perception of unlimited space lies the perception of no-space, of space losing its meaning. When the mind attends to this feature within the First Immaterial Attainment, space disappears and is replaced by perception of absolute one-pointedness of consciousness. As indicated above by the common experience of one-pointedness of time, in the state that perceives one-pointedness of consciousness, consciousness simultaneously feels infinite and empty, immeasurable and undefined. One has entered the second Immaterial Attainment of the mind-base of unlimited consciousness. This is the perception that fills the mind completely and persists without wavering for even longer periods of time.

· THE MIND-BASE OF NOTHINGNESS

Within the perception of unlimited consciousness lies the perception of no-consciousness, of consciousness now losing it meaning as well. When the mind focuses on this feature within the Second Immaterial Attainment, all perception of consciousness disappears. Perceptions of material form and space have already disappeared, and so all that one is left with is the one-pointedness of nothingness. One has entered the Third Immaterial Attainment of the mind-base of nothingness. This is the concept that fills the mind totally, persisting unchanging for yet longer periods of time.

· THE MIND-BASE OF NEITHER PERCEPTION NOR NON-PERCEPTION

Within the perception of nothingness lies the perception of not even nothing! If the mind is subtle enough to see this feature" then the perception of nothingness disappears and is replaced by the perception of neither perception nor no perception. All that one can say about this Fourth Immaterial Attainment is that it is, in fact, a perception (AN 9's, 42). In the simile of the thousand petalled lotus, this state is represented by the 1,000th layer of petals, still dosed, with all the 999 other layers of petals fully open. The l000th petal is almost a non-petal, being the most subtle and sublime of all. For it clasps within its gossamer fabric the famous "Jewel in the heart of the lotus," Nibbana.

NIBBANA, THE END OF All PERCEPTION

For within the perception of neither perception nor no-perception lies the end of all perception, the cessation of all that is felt or perceived, Nibbana. If the mind attends to this, the mind stops. When the mind starts again one gains the attainment of Arahant or Anagami, these are the only possibilities.

· THE SEQUENCE OF GRADUAL CESSATION

Another way of viewing the Jhanas and the Four Immaterial Attainments is by placing them in the sequence of gradual cessation. The process that legds into the First Jhana is the cessation of the world of the five senses together with the body and all doing. The path from the First Jhana to the Fourth Jhana is the cessation of that part of the "mind that recognizes pleasure and displeasure. The road from the Fourth Jhana to the Fourth Immaterial Attainment is the cessation, almost, of the remaining activity or the mind called "knowing." And the last step is the cessation of the last vestige of knowing. Through Jhanas and the Immaterial Attainments, first one lets go of the body and the world of the five senses. Then one lets go of the doer. Then one lets go of pleasure and displeasure. The one lets go of space and consciousness. Then one lets go of all knowing. When °I1_ lets go of an object, the object disappears, ceases. If it remains, one hasn't let go. Through letting go of all knowing, knowing ceases. This is the cessation of everything, including the mind. This is the place where consciousness no longer manifests, where earth, water, fire and air find no footing, where name-and-form are wholly destroyed, (DN 11,85). Emptiness. Cessation. Nibbana, The "jewel" in the heart of the lotus.

FINAL WORDS

In this part on the Jhanas, I have led you on a journey from theory through to practice up to the high mountain ranges where lie the great summits that are the Jhanas, and up higher to the rarefied peaks that are the Immaterial Attainments. Though the tour may seem way beyond you today, tomorrow you may find yourself well on the route. So it is helpful even today to have this road map before you.

Moreover, these Jhanas are like immensely rich gold mines, but carrying the most precious of insights rather than one of the most precious metals. They supply the raw material, the unexpected data, which build those special insights that open one's eyes to Nibbana. The Jhanas are jewels that adorn the face of Buddhism. Moreover, not only are they essential to the experience of Enlightenment, they are possible today!

I conclude this part with the words of the Lord Buddha:

Natthi Jhanam Apannassa

There is no Jhana without wisdom

Panna Natthi Ajhayato

There is no wisdom without Jhana

Yamhi Jhanan Ca Panna ca

But for one with both Jhana and wisdom

Sa Ve Nibbana Santike

They are in the presence of Nibbana